DVD-D360K
DVD-D530
DVD-D530K
DVD Player
User Manual
imagine the possibilities
Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product.
To receive more complete service, please register your product at
www.samsung.com/global/register
AK68-02046A
ENGLISH
Precautions
Table of contens
1. Setting up
- Refer to the identification label located on the rear of your player for its proper operating voltage.
- Install your player in a cabinet with adequate ventilation holes. (7~10cm). Do not block ventilation holes on any of the components for air circulation.
- Do not push the disc tray in by hand.
- Do not stack components.
- Be sure to turn all components off before moving the player.
- Before connecting other components to this player, be sure to turn them off.
- Be sure to remove the disc and turn off the player after use, especially if you are not going to use it for a long time.
- The mains plug is used as a disconnect device and shall stay readily operable at any time.
2. For your safety
- This product utilizes a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of
procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
- Do not open covers and do not repair your self. Refer servicing to qualified personal.
3. Caution
2
- Your player is not intended for industrial use but for domestic purposes. Use of this product is for personal use only.
- Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and no objects filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be placed on the apparatus.
- Exterior influences such as lightning and static electricity can affect normal operation of this player. If this occurs, turn theplayer off and on again with the POWER button, or disconnect and then reconnect the AC power cord to the AC power outlet. The player will operate normally.
- When condensation forms inside the player due to sharp changes in temperature, the player may not operate correctly. If this occurs, leave the player at room tempera-
ture until the inside of the player becomes dry and operational.
4. Disc
- Do not clean disc using record-cleaning sprays, benzene, thinner, or other volatile solvents that may cause damage to the disc surface.
- Do not touch the disc’s bottom. Hold by the edges or by one edge and the hole in the center.
- Wipe the dirt away gently; never wipe a cloth back and forth over the disc.
5. Environmental info
- The battery used in this product contains chemicals that are harmful to the environment.
- So, dispose the batteries in the proper- manner, according to federal, state, and local regulations.
The product unit accomparied this user manual is
licenced under certain intellectual property rights
of certain third parties. This licence is limited to
private non-commercial use by end-user consumers for licenced contents. No rights are granted
for commercial use. The licence does not cover
any product unit other than this product unit and
the licence does not extend to any unlicenced
product unit or pro-cess conforming to ISO/OUR
11172-3 or ISO/OUR 13818-3 used or sold in
combination with this product unit. The licence
only covers the use of this product unit to encode
and/or decode audio files conforming to the ISO/
OUR 11172-3 or ISO/OUR 13818-3. No rights are
granted under this licence for product features
or functions that do not conform to the ISO/OUR
11172-3 or ISO/OUR 13818-3.
CAUTION: USE OF ANY CONTROLS,
ADJUSTMENTS, OR PROCEDURES OTHER
THAN SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN
HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE
Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setup
General Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tour of the Remote Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connections
Choosing a Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Functions
Playing a Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Search and Skip Functions . . . . . . . . .
Using the Display Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Disc and Title Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Repeat Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Slow Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advanced Functions
Adjusting the Aspect Ratio (EZ View). . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Audio Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Subtitle Language. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Camera Angle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Bookmark Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Zoom Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clips Menu for MP3/WMA/JPEG/MPEG4/
CD Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Folder Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
3
3
4
6
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
MP3/WMA/CD Audio Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
MPEG4 Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Playing Media Files using the USB HOST
feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
CD Ripping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Picture CD Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Picture CD Playback for HD-JPEG
(Only DVD-D530K/DVD-D530) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Karaoke Functions
(Only DVD-D530K/D360K)
Karaoke Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Changing Setup Menu
Using the Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Setting Up the Display Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Setting Up the Audio Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Setting Up the System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Setting Up the Language Features. . . . . . . . . . . 12
Setting Up the Security Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Setting Up the General Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Setting Up the Support Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Reference
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Setup
General Features
Excellent Sound
Dolby Digital, a technology developed by Dolby
Laboratories, provides crystal clear sound
reproduction.
Screen
Both regular and widescreen(16:9) pictures can
be viewed.
Slow Motion
An important scene can be viewed in slow motion.
1080p Playback (Only DVD-D530K/
DVD-D530)
This player upconverts regular DVDs for playback on 1080p TVs.
Parental Control (DVD)
The parental control allows users to set the
neces-sary level to prohibit children from viewing harmful movies such as those with violence,
adult subject matter, etc.
Various On-Screen Menu
Functions
You can select various languages (Audio/
Subtitle) and screen angles while enjoying
movies.
Progressive Scan
Progressive scanning creates an improved
picture with double the scan lines of a conventional inter-laced picture
EZ VIEW (DVD)
Easy View enables picture adjustment to match
your TV’s screen size (16:9 or 4:3).
Digital Photo Viewer (JPEG)
You can view Digital Photos on your TV.
Repeat
You can repeat a song or movie simply by
press-ing the REPEAT button
MP3/WMA
This unit can play discs contain MP3/WMA files.
MPEG4
This unit can play MPEG4 formats within an
avi file.
HDMI (High Definition Multimedia
Interface) (Only DVD-D530K/DVDD530)
HDMI reduces picture noise by allowing a puredigital video/audio signal path from the player
to your TV.
CD Ripping
This feature lets you to copy audio files from
disc to USB device into MP3 format. (Only
Audio CD (CD DA)).
Note
- Discs which cannot be played with this
player.
• DVD-ROM • DVD-RAM
• CD-ROM • CDV
• CDI • CVD
- Ability to play back may depend on recording
conditions.
• DVD-R, +R
• CD-RW
• DVD+RW, -RW (V mode)
- The unit may not play certain CD-R, CD-RW
and DVD-R due to the disc type or recording
conditions.
MODEL 576p, 720p, 1080p DVD PLAYER, PLEASE
CONTACT SAMSUNG’S CUSTOMER SERVICE
CENTER.”
Disc Markings
~
PAL
PAL broadcast system in U.K,
France, Germany, etc.
Dolby Digital disc
STEREO
STEREO
Stereo disc
DIGITAL
SOUND
Digital Audio disc
MP3 disc
Region Number
Both the DVD player and the discs are coded
by region. These regional codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the codes do not
match, the disc will not play.
The Region Number for this player is described
on the rear panel of the player.
Many DVD discs are encoded with copy protection. Because of this, you should only connect your DVD player directly to your TV, not to
a VCR. Connecting to a VCR results in a distorted picture from copy-protected DVD discs.
DivX Certification
PROGRESSIVE SCAN OUTPUTS
(576p,720p,1080p)
“CONSUMERS SHOULD NOTE THAT NOT
ALL HIGH DEFINITION TELEVISION SETS ARE
FULLY COMPATIBLE WITH THIS PRODUCT AND
MAY CAUSE ARTIFACTS TO BE DISPLAYED
IN THE PICTURE, IN CASE OF 576, 720, 1080
PROGRESSIVE SCAN PICTURE PROBLEMS, IT IS
RECOMMENDED THAT THE USER SWITCH THE
CONNECTION TO THE ‘STANDARD DEFINITION’
OUTPUT. IF THERE ARE QUESTIONS REGARDING
YOUR TV SET COMPATIBILITY WITH THIS
7
DVD-D530
Play Region Number
COPY PROTECTION
This item incorporates copy protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights of ROVI Corporation.
Reverse engineering and disassembly are
prohibited.
Description
Front Panel Controls
DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of
DivXNetworks, Inc and are used under license.
“DivX Certified to play DivX video, including
premium content.”
Covered by one or more of the following U.S
patents : 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710;
7,519,274.
7
DVD-D530K
DVD-D360K
1. DISC TRAY
Place the disc here.
2. DISPLAY
Operation indicators are displayed here.
3. OPEN/CLOSE ( )
Press to open and close the disc tray.
4. STOP ( )
Stops play.
5. PLAY/PAUSE ( )
Play or pause the disc.
6.
7.
8.
POWER ON/OFF (
)
Turn on/off and the player is turned on/off.
USB HOST
Connect digital still camera, MP3 player,
memory stick, Card reader other removable
storage devices.
MIC
(Only DVD-D530K/D360K)
Connect Microphone for karaoke functions.
Tour of the Remote Control
DVD-D360K
1
6
7
8
24
11
10
12
DVD-D530K
DVD-D530
15
18
17
5
26
28
27
13
22
21
14
30
20
1
2
3
4
5
15
9
16
17
18
19
28
21
22
23
24
10
11
12
25
26
27
6
7
20
29
15
9
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
10
11
12
25
26
27
6
7
8
13
13
14
1
2
3
4
5
14
28
29
30
3
1. DVD POWER Button
Turns the power on or off.
2. DVD Button
(Only DVD-D530K/D530)
Use to select the DVD player for operation.
3. TV Button
(Only DVD-D530K/D530)
Use to select a Samsung TV for operation.
4. EZ VIEW Button
(Only DVD-D530K/D530)
Lets you easily adjust the aspect ratio of a
picture according to the screen size of your
TV (16:9 or 4:3).
5. MARKER Button
6. REPEAT Button
Allows you to repeat play a title, chapter,
track, or disc.
7. DISC MENU Button
Brings up the Disc menu.
8. RECORD Button
(Only DVD-D530K/D360K)
Use to Karaoke recording.
9. TV VOL (+, -) Buttons
(Only DVD-D530K/D530)
Controls volume.
10. SKIP Buttons ( / )
Use to skip the title, chapter or track.
11. STOP Button ( )
12. MENU Button
Brings up the DVD player’s menu.
13. ENTER/π/†,√/® Buttons
This button functions as a toggle switch.
14. TOOLS Button
Displays the current disc mode. It also lets
you access the Display function.
15. OPEN/CLOSE ( ) Button
To open and close the disc tray.
16. HDMI SEL. Button
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
(Only DVD-D530K/D530)
HDMI Output resolution setup.
USB Button
VIDEO SEL. Button
Changes video output mode.
REPEAT A-B Button
(Only DVD-D530K/D530)
Allows you to repeat play a chosen section
(A-B) on a disc.
INFO Button
Used to displays playback info banner.
TITLE MENU Button
Brings up the Title menu.
AUDIO/TV SOURCE Button
Use this button to access various audio
functions on a disc. Use this button to select
an available TV source (mode TV).
PAUSE Button ( )
(Only DVD-D530K/D530)
Pauses disc play.
SEARCH Buttons ( / )
Allows you to search forward/backward
through a disc.
TV CH ( ,
) Buttons
(Only DVD-D530K/D530)
Channel selection.
PLAY Button ( )/( )
Begins disc play.
RETURN Button
Returns to a previous menu.
SUBTITLE/(π) Button
EXIT Button
(Only DVD-D530K/D530)
Exits the on-screen menu.
KARAOKE (†) Button
(Only DVD-D530K/D360K)
To access karaoke menu (Keycon, mic volume, Echo).
Connections
Choosing a Connection
The following shows examples of connections commonly used to connect the DVD player with a TV and
other components.
Before Connecting the DVD Player
- Always turn off the DVD player, TV, and other components before you connect or disconnect any cables.
- Refer to the user’s manual of the additional components you are connecting for more information on
those particular components.
4
A.Connecting to a TV (For Video)
1. Using video/audio cables, connect the VIDEO (yellow)/AUDIO (red and white) OUT terminals on
the rear of the DVD player to the VIDEO (yellow)/AUDIO (red and white) IN terminals of TV.
2. Turn on the DVD player and TV.
3. Press the input selector on your TV remote control until the Video signal from the DVD player
appears on the TV screen.
Note
- Noise may be generated if the audio cable is too close to the power cable.
- If you want to connect to an Amplifier, please refer to the Amplifier connection page.
- The number and position of terminals can vary depending on your TV set. Please refer to the user’s
manual of the TV.
- If there is one audio input terminal on the TV, connect it to the [AUDIO OUT][left] (white) terminal of
the DVD player.
- If you press the VIDEO SEL. button when DVD Player is in stop mode or no disc is inserted, the Video
Output mode changes in the following sequence: (I-SCAN ➝ P-SCAN)
B.Connection to a TV (Interlace/Progressive)
1. Using component video cables, connect the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminal on the rear of the
DVD player to the COMPONENT IN terminal of TV.
2. Using the audio cables, connect the AUDIO (red and white) OUT terminals on the rear of the DVD
player to the AUDIO (red and white) IN terminals of TV. Turn on the DVD player and TV.
3. Press the input selector on your TV remote control until the Component signal from the DVD player
appears on the TV screen.
4. Set the Video Output to I-SCAN/P-SCAN in the Display Setup menu. You can use the VIDEO SEL.
button to change the Video Output mode.
Note
- What is “Progressive Scan”?
Progressive scan has twice as many scanning lines as the interlace output method has. Progressive
scanning method can provide better and clearer picture quality.
C.Connecting to a TV with DVI/HDMI Jack (ONLY DVD-D530K/D530)
1. Using the HDMI-DVI/HDMI-HDMI cable , connect the HDMI OUT terminal on the rear of the DVD
player to the DVI/HDMI IN terminal of your TV.
2. Using the audio cables, connect the AUDIO (red and white) OUT terminals on the rear of the DVD
player to the AUDIO (red and white) IN terminals of your TV. Turn on the DVD player and TV.
3. Press the input selector on your TV remote control until the DVI/HDMI signal from the DVD player
appears on your TV screen.
HDMI VIDEO Specifications (ONLY DVD-D530K/D530)
When you press the HDMI SEL. button, 480p, 576p, 720p, 1080p, 1080i are selected in order.
The first press of the HDMI SEL. button brings up the current resolution.
The second press allows you to change the HDMI output resolution.
- Depending on your TV, certain HDMI output resolutions may not work.
- Please refer to the user’s manual of your TV.
- If HDMI or HDMI-DVI cable is plugged into TV, the DVD player’s output is set to HDMI/DVI within 10
seconds.
- If you set the HDMI output resolution 720p,1080p or 1080i, HDMI output provides better picture quality.
- If you connect an HDMI cable between Samsung TV and this DVD player, you can operate this
DVD player using your TV remote control. This is only available with Samsung TVs that support
Anynet+(HDMI-CEC).
- If your TV has an
logo, then it will
Supports the Anynet+ Function.
• HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface)
HDMI is an interface to enable the digital transmission of video and audio data with just a single
connector.Using HDMI, the DVD player transmits a digital video and audio signal and displays a
vivid picture on a TVhaving an HDMI input jack.
• HDMI connection description HDMI connector
- Both uncompressed video data and digital audio data (LPCM or Bit Stream data).- Though the player uses a HDMI cable, the player outputs only a pure digital signal to the TV.
- If TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital content protection), snow noise appears on the screen.
• Why does Samsung use HDMI?
Analog TVs require an analog video/audio signal. However, when playing a DVD, the data transmitted to a TV is digital. Therefore either a digital-to-analog converter (in the DVD player) or an
analog-to-digital converter (in the TV) is required. During this conver-sion, the picture quality is
degraded due to noise and signal loss. DVI technology is superior because it requires no D/A conversion and is a pure digital sig-nal from the player to your TV.
• What is the HDCP?
HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) is a system for protecting DVD content outputted
via DVI from being copied. It provides a secure digital link between a video source (PC, DVD. etc) and a
display device (TV, projector . etc). Content is encrypted at the source device to prevent unauthorized.
DVD-D530K
DVD-D530
2-Channel stereo amplifier
or Dolby digital
D
Audio Cable
Coaxial Cable
WHITE
WHITE
BLUE
GREEN
RED
RED
RED
YELLOW
Audio Cable
RED
A
Video
Cable
B
WHITE YELLOW
Component
Cable
C
OR
HDMI-DVI cable
RED BLUE GREEN
HDMI cable
DVD-D360K
D.Connection to an Audio System (2 Channel Amplifier, Dolby Digital, or MPEG2 )
1. Using the audio cables, connect the AUDIO (red and white) OUT terminals on the rear of the DVD
player to the AUDIO (red and white) IN terminals of the Amplifier. If using a coaxial cable, connect
the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (COAXIAL) terminal on the rear of the DVD player to the DIGITAL AUDIO
IN (COAXIAL) terminal of the Amplifier.
2. Using the video signal cable(s), connect the VIDEO, COMPONENT or HDMI OUT terminals on the
rear of the DVD player to the VIDEO, COMPONENT or DVI IN terminals of your TV
3. Turn on the DVD player, TV, and Amplifier.
4. Press the input select button of the Amplifier to select external input in order to hear sound from the
DVD player. Refer to your Amplifier's user manual to set the Amplifier's audio input.
WHITE
RED
D
COAXIAL CABLE
BLUE
2-Channel stereo ampilfier,
Dolby digital
RED
WHITE
GREEN
WHITE
WHITE
RED
RED
RED
YELLOW
VIDEO CABLE
AUDIO CABLE
RED
WHITE
A
B
YELLOW
COMPONENT CABLE
RED BLUE GREEN
5
Basic functions
Using the Display Function
When Playing a DVD/VCD/MPEG4
Playing a Disc
Before Play
- Turn on your TV and set it to the correct Video Input by pressing TV/VIDEO button on the TV remote control.
- If you connected an external Audio System, turn on your Audio System and set it to the correct Audio Input.
After plugging in the player, the first time you press the DVD POWER button, this screen comes up: If
you want to select a language, press the π/† button, and then press the ENTER button. (This screen
will only appear when you plug in the player for the first time.)If the language for the startup screen is
not set, the set-tings may change whenever you turn the power on or off. Therefore, make sure that you
select the language you want to use.Once you select a menu language, you can change it by pressing
the ®|| button on the front panel of the unit for more than 5 seconds with no disc in the unit. Then the
SELECT MENU LANGUAGE window appears again where you can reset your preferred language.
Using the Search and Skip Functions
1.
2.
3.
4.
During play, press the TOOLS button on the remote control.
Press the π/† buttons to select the desired item.
Press the √/® buttons to make the desired setup.
To make the screen disappear, press the TOOLS button again.
The functions when using the Display function are listed in the table below.
To access the desired title when there is more than one in the disc. For example, if there is
more than one movie on a DVD, each movie will be identified.
Most DVD discs are recorded in chapters so that you can quickly find a specific passage.
Allows playback of the film from a desired time. You must enter the starting time as a reference.The time search function does not operate on some disc.
Refers to the language of the film soundtrack. In the example, the soundtrack is played in
English 5.1CH. A DVD disc can have up to eight different soundtracks.
Refers to the subtitle languages available in the disc. You will be able to choose the subtitle languages or, if you prefer, turn them off from the screen. A DVD disc can have up to 32 different subtitles.
During play, you can search quickly through a chapter or track, and use the skip function to jump to the
next selection.
Searching through a Chapter or Track
During play, press the SEARCH (k or K) button on the remote control for more than 1 second.
DVD
CD
VCD
2X, 4X, 8X, 16X, 32X
2X, 4X, 8X, 16X, 32X
4X, 8X
Note
- The speed marked in this function may be different from the
actual playback speed.
- No sound is hearing during search mode (Except CD).
Skipping Tracks
During play, press the SKIP (|k or K|) button.
- When playing a DVD, if you press the SKIP (K|) button, it moves to the next chapter. If you press the
SKIP (|k) button, it moves to the beginning of the chapter. One more press makes it move to the
beginning of the previous chapter.
- When playing a VCD, if you press the SKIP (K|) button, it moves to the next track. If you press the
SKIP (|k) button, it moves to the beginning of the track. One more press makes it move to the
beginning of the previous track.
- If a track exceeds 15 minutes when playing a VCD and you press the K| button, it moves forward 5
minutes. If you press the |k button, it moves to the beginning of the track. One more press makes
it move to the beginning of the previous track.
6
EZ
User will be able to choose EZ-View type.
Press enter to activate the Zoom function.
To access the desired Angle function. Some DVD disc are have more than one recorded angle.
Using the Disc and Title Menu
During the playback of a DVD disc, press the DISC MENU/TITLE MENU button on the remote control.
Note
- Depending on a disc, the Disc Menu/Title Menu may not work.
- You can also use the Disc Menu, using the DISC MENU button on the remote control.
- Title Menu will only be displayed if there are at least two titles in the disc.
Repeat Play
Repeat the current track, chapter, title, a chosen section (A-B), or all of the disc.
When playing a DVD/VCD
1.
2.
Press the REPEAT button on the remote control. Repeat screen appears.
Press the REPEAT or π/† button to change playback mode. DVD repeats play by chapter or title.
- Off.
- Title : repeats the title that is playing.
- Chapter : repeats the chapter that is playing.
- Repeat A-B (Only DVD-D360K)
Using the A-B Repeat function (Only DVD-D360K)
Note
This function may behave differently depending on the type of disc.
1.Press the REPEAT button on the remote control. The repeat screen appears.
2.Press the π/† button to select the REPEAT A-B and then press ENTER.
3.Press the ENTER at the point where you want repeat play to start (A).
4.Press the ENTER at the point where you want repeat play to start (B).
You can select a desired audio language quickly and easily with the AUDIO button.
Using the A-B Repeat function (Only DVD-D530K/D530)
Using the AUDIO/ √ button (DVD/VCD/MPEG4)
1.Press the REPEAT A-B button on the remote control.
2.Press the REPEAT A-B button at the point where you want repeat play to start (A).
3.Press the REPEAT A-B button at the point where you want the repeat play to stop (B).
3. To return to normal play, press the REPEAT A-B button until the display shows Repeat : Off.
Note
- A-B REPEAT allows you to set point (B) directly after point (A) has been set.
- Depending on a disc, the Repeat function may not work.
1. During play, Press the AUDIO/ √ button. Change the audio language by pressing the AUDIO or
π/† button.
- The audio languages are represented by abbreviations.
2. To remove the AUDIO icon, press the EXIT/RETURN button.
Note
- This function depends on audio languages are encoded on the disc and may not work.
- A DVD disc can contain up to 8 audio languages.
Selecting the Subtitle Language
Slow Play
You can select a desired subtitle quickly and easily with the SUBTITLE/(π) button.
This feature allows you slowly to repeat scenes con-taining sports, dancing, musical instruments
being played etc., so you can study them more closely.
When playing a DVD
1. During play, press the PAUSE ( )/PLAY ( ) button.
2. Press the SEARCH (k/K) button to choose the play speed between 1/2, 1/4, 1/8,1/16,1/2 and
so on. If you want to go normal play press PLAY button.
Advanced functions
Adjusting the Aspect Ratio (EZ View)
To play back using aspect ratio (DVD)
1. During play, press the EZ VIEW/TOOLS button on the remote control.
2. Press the EZ VIEW or π/† buttons to select the screen size. Each time you press the π/† or √/®
buttons, the screen size changes. For graphics of the screen sizes and lists of the sequences in
which the sizes change, see the next column.
3. Press the EXIT/RETURN button to exit EZ View.
If you are using a 16:9 TV
If you are using a 4:3 TV
For 16:9 aspect ratio discs
- WIDE SCREEN
- SCREEN FIT
- ZOOM FIT
For 16:9 aspect ratio discs
- 4:3 Letter Box
- 4:3 Pan Scan
- SCREEN FIT
- ZOOM FIT
For 4:3 aspect ratio discs
- Normal Wide
- SCREEN FIT
- ZOOM FIT
- Vertical Fit
Selecting the Audio Language
For 4:3 aspect ratio discs
- Normal Screen
- SCREEN FIT
- ZOOM FIT
Using the SUBTITLE/(π) button (DVD/MPEG4)
1. During play, Press the SUBTITLE/(π) button.
2. Press the SUBTITLE/(π) or π/† button to change the language. Each time you press the
SUBTITLE/(π) or π/† button, the language changes.
3. To remove the SUBTITLE icon, press the EXIT/RETURN button.
Note
- The subtitle languages are represented by abbreviations.
- You have to change the desired subtitle in the Disc Menu, according to discs. Press the DISC MENU
button.
- This function depends on what subtitles are encoded on the disc and may not work on all DVDs.
- A DVD disc can contain up to 32 subtitle languages.
Changing the Camera Angle
When a DVD contains multiple angles of a particular scene, you can use the ANGLE function.
Using the ANGLE function (DVD)
If the disc contains multiple angles, the ANGLE appears on the screen.
1. During play, press the TOOLS button on the remote control.
2. Press the π/† buttons to select
icon. When the angle screen is displayed, press the √/® buttons on the remote control to select the desired angle option.
Using the Bookmark Function
This feature lets you bookmark sections of a DVD or VCD (Menu Off mode) so you can quickly find
them at a later time.
Using the Bookmark Function (DVD/VCD)
1. During play, press the MARKER button on the remote control.
2. When you reach the scene you want to mark, press the √/® or π/† buttons, and then press
MARKER button. Up to 12 scenes may be marked at a time.
7
Repeat/Random playback
Note
- Depending on a disc, the Bookmark function may not work.
Press the REPEAT button to change the playback mode. There are four modes, such as Off, Track,
Folder 1and Random.
- Off ( ): Normal Playback
1
- Track ( 1 ): Repeats
the current song file.
- Folder ( ): Repeats the song files which have the same extension in the current folder.
1
- Random ( ): Song
files which have the same extension will be played in random order.
To resume normal play, press the REPEAT button until the Repeat : Off.
Recalling a Marked Scene
1. During play, press the MARKER button on the remote control.
2. Press the √/® orπ/† buttons to select a marked scene.
3. Press the PLAY () button to skip to the marked scene.
Clearing a Bookmark
CD-R MP3/WMA file
1. During play, press the MARKER button on the remote control.
2. Press the √/® orπ/† buttons to select the bookmark number you want to delete.
3. Press the ENTER button to delete a bookmark number.
Using the Zoom Function
Using the Zoom Function (DVD/VCD)
1. During play or pause mode, press the TOOLS buttons on the remote control.
2. Press the π/† buttons to select
icon, then press the ENTER button to zoom in X1,X2,X3,X4.
Clips Menu for MP3/WMA/JPEG/MPEG4/CD Audio
CD Audio or discs with MP3/WMA/JPEG/MPEG4 contain individual songs and/or pictures that can
be organized into folders as shown below. They are similar to how you use your computer to put
files into different folders.
To go access these folders and the files in them, follow these steps :
Videos \
1.
2.
3.
1/2
Pages
Open the disc tray. Place the disc on the tray.
Close the tray. The tray closes and the Parent Folder Menu screen
appears (top screen image.) Parent folders contain all the Peer folders that have the same kind of content: music, video, photos, etc.
Press the √/® buttons to select the Parent folder of your choice, and then
press the ENTER. A screen displaying the Peer folders appears. The Peer folders contain all the folders with the same kind of content (video, music, photos, etc.) that are in the Parent folder.
CD
Pages
Move
Return
Folder Selection
The folder can be selected both in Stop or Play mode.
- To select the Parent Folder
Press the RETURN button to go to parent folder, or press the π/† buttons to select “..” and press
ENTER to go to the parent folder.
- To select the Peer Folder
Press the π/† buttons to select the desired folder, then press ENTER.
- To select the Sub-Folder
Press the π/† buttons to select the desired folder, then press ENTER.
MP3/WMA/CD Audio Playback
1. Open the disc tray. Place the disc on the tray. Close the tray.
2. Press the √/® buttons to select a Music folder, and then press ENTER. Press the π/† buttons
to select a song file, and then press the ENTER to begin playback of the song.
8
When you record MP3 or WMA files on CD-R, please refer to the following.
- Your MP3 or WMA files should be ISO 9660 or JOLIET format.
ISO 9660 format and Joliet MP3 or WMA files are compatible with Microsoft’s DOS and Windows, and with
Apple’s Mac. This format is the most widely used.
- When naming your MP3 or WMA files, do not exceed 8 characters, and enter “.mp3, .wma” as the file extension.
General name format : Title.mp3. or Title.wma. When composing your title, make sure that you use 8 characters or less, have no spaces in the name, and avoid the use of special characters including: (.,/,\,=,+).
- Use a decompression transfer rate of at least 128 Kbps when recording MP3 files.
Sound quality with MP3 files basically depends on the rate of compression/decompression you choose.
Getting CD audio sound requires an analog/digital sampling rate, that is conversion to MP3 format, of at
least 128 Kbps and up to 160 Kbps. However, choosing higher rates, like 192 Kbps or more, only rarely give
better sound quality. Conversely, files with decompression rates below 128 Kbps will not be played properly.
- Use a decompression transfer rate of at least 64Kbps when recording WMA files.
Sound quality with WMA files basically depends on the rate of compression/decompression you choose.
Getting CD audio sound requires an analog/digital sampling rate, that is conversion to WMA format, of
at least 64Kbps and up to 192Kbps. Conversely, files with decompression rates below 64Kbps or over
192Kbps will not be played properly. Sampling rate that can be supported for WMA files is > 30Khz.
- Do not try recording copyright protected MP3 files.
Certain “secured” files are encrypted and code protected to prevent illegal copying. These files are of the
following types: Windows MediaTM (registered trade mark of Microsoft Inc) and SDMITM (registered trade mark
of The SDMI Foundation). You cannot copy such files.
- Important:
The above recommendations cannot be taken as a guarantee that the DVD player will play MP3 recordings,
or as an assurance of sound quality. You should note that certain technologies and methods for MP3 file
recording on CD-Rs prevent optimal playback of these files on your DVD player (degraded sound quality
and in some cases, inability of the player to read the files).
- This unit can play a maximum of 500 files and 500 folders per disc.
MPEG4 Playback
MPEG4 Play Function
AVI files are used to contain the audio and video data. Only AVI format files with the “.avi” extensions
can be played.
1. Open the disc tray. Place the disc on the tray. Close the tray.
2. Press the √/® buttons to select a Videos Menu , then press the ENTER. Press the π/† to select
an avi file (DivX/XviD) then press the ENTER. Press the π/† and then press the ENTER button.
Repeat and Repeat A-B playback
This unit supports all resolutions up to maximum below.
1.
Press the REPEAT button , then press REPEAT or π/† buttons to change playback mode. There are 3 modes, such as Off, Folder and Title.
- Off : No Repeat mode.
- Title : repeats the title that is playing.
- Folder : repeats the AVI files which have the same extension in the current folder.
Repeat A-B playback (Only DVD-D360K)
1.Press the REPEAT button on the remote control. The repeat screen appears.
2.Press the π/† button to select the REPEAT A-B and then press ENTER.
3.Press the ENTER at the point where you want repeat play to start (A).
4.Press the ENTER at the point where you want repeat play to start (B).
Repeat A-B playback (Only DVD-D530K/D530)
1.Press the REPEAT A-B button on the remote control.
2.Press the REPEAT A-B button at the point where you want repeat play to start (A).
3.Press the REPEAT A-B button at the point where you want the repeat play to stop (B)
- To return to normal play, press the REPEAT A-B button until the display shows Repeat : Off.
Note
- A-B REPEAT allow you to set point (B) directly after point (A) has been set.
Description
Skip
(|k or K|)
During play, press the |k or K| button, it moves to next or previous track.
Search
(k or K)
During play, press the SEARCH (k or K) button and press again to search at
a faster speed. Allows you to search at a faster speed in an AVI file. (2X, 4X, 8X,
16X, 32X)
Slow Motion Play
ZOOM
720 x 480 @30fps
720 x 576 @25fps:
Maximum bitrate : 4Mbps
Note
• The resolution that can be supported by
DVD-D530/D530K model up to 720 x 480
@30 frames/ 720 x 576 @25 frames.
• This unit supports CD-R/RW written in
MPEG4 in accordance with the “ISO9660
format”.
Playing Media Files Using the USB Host feature
You can enjoy the media files such as pictures, movies andtunes saved in an MP3 player, USB memory
or digital camera in high audio by connecting the storage device to the USB port of the DVD Player.
Using the USB HOST feature
1. Connect the USB device to the USB port on the front of the unit.
2. The USB Menu screen appears. Press the √/® button to select Menu, then press ENTER.
3. Press the π/† buttons to select a file in the USB device. Press ENTER to Open the file.
Note
• Each time the USB button on the remote control is pressed, a frame of the USB device selection
will appear.
• “USB Loading” appears on the display screen.
• Depends on the file size and clip duration, loading time on USB may take longer than using CD or DVD
media.
MPEG4 Function Description
Function
DivX5
• USB MENU screen appears on the TV screen and the saved file is played.
• If there is a Disc in the unit, pressing the DVD button (DVD-D530K/DVD-D530) or USB button (DVDD360K) will make the player exit the USB menu and load the disc
Safe USB Removal
1. Press the DVD button (DVD-D530K/DVD-D530) or USB button (DVD-D360K) to return to disc mode or the main screen.
2. Press the STOP (■) button
3. Remove the USB cable.
Allows you to search at a slower speed in an AVI file. (1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/16)
Skip Forward/Back
X1/X2/X3/X4/Normal in order
During playback, press the (|k/K|) button.
• When there is more than one file, when you press the K| button, the next file is selected.
• When there is more than one file, when you press the |k button, the previous file is selected.
- These functions may not work depending on MPEG4 file.
CD-R AVI fileThis
unit can play the following video compression
formats within the AVI file format:
- DivX 3.11 contents
- DivX 4 contents (Based on MPEG-4 Simple
Profile)
- DivX 5 contents (MPEG-4 simple profile plus
additional features such as bi-directional frames.
Qpel and GMC are also supported.)
- XviD MPEG-4 compliant Contents.
DVD-RW & DVD+R
Format that support for DivX file :
- Basic DivX format DivX3.11 / 4.12/ 5.x
- Xvid (MPEG-4 compliant video codec) and
DivX Pro
- File format : *.avi, *.div, *.divx.
Possible warning messages that may appear
when trying to play DivX/AVI files are :
1. No Authorization
- File with bad registration code.
2. Unsupported Codec
- Files with certain Codec Types, Versions
(ex. MP4, AFS and other proprietary
codecs) are not suppoerted by this player.
3. Unsupported Resolution
- Files containing resolutions higher than the player’s specification are not supported.
Fast playback
To play back the disc at a faster speed, press (k/K) during playback
• Each time you press either button, the playback speed will change as follows : 2X ➞ 4X ➞ 8X ➞ 16X
➞ 32X.
Compatible Devices
1. USB devices that support USB Mass Storage v1.0.(USB devices that operate as a removable disk in Windows (2000 or later) without additional driver installation.)
2. MP3 Player: Flash type MP3 player.
3. Digital camera: Cameras that support USB Mass Storage v1.0.
• Cameras that operate as a removable disk in Windows (2000 or later) without additional driver installation.
4. USB Flash Drive: Devices that support USB2.0 or USB1.1.
• You may experience a difference in playback quality when you connect a USB1.1 device.
5. USB card Reader: One slot USB card reader and Multi slot USB card reader
9
• Depending on the manufacturer. the USB card reader may not be supported.
• If you install multiple memory devices into a multi card reader, you may experience problems.
6. If you use a USB extension cable, the USB device might not be recognized.
• CBI (Control/Bulk/Interrupt) is not supported.
• Digital Cameras that use PTP protocol or require additional program installation when connected to a
PC are not supported.
• A device using NTFS file system is not supported. (Only FAT 16/32 (File Allocation Table 16/32) file
system is supported.)
• Some MP3 players, when connected to this product,may not operate depending on the sector size of
their file system.
• The USB HOST function is not supported if a product that transfers media files by its manufacturerspecific program is connected.
• Does not operate with Janus enabled MTP(Media Transfer Protocol) devices.
• The USB host function of this product does not support all USB devices.
• The USB Host does not support USB Hard Disc Drives (HDD).
CD Ripping
This feature allows you to copy audio files from a disc to a USB device in MP3 format.
Open the dics tray. Place the Audio CD(CD DA) disc on the tray, and close the tray. Connect the USB
device to the USB port on the front of the unit. Press the DVD button (DVD-D530K/DVD-D530) or USB button (DVD-D360K).
1. Press the TOOLS button to display the Ripping screen.
2. Press the π/† buttons, then press the ENTER button to select files for ripping.
- To deselect files, press ENTER button again.
3. Press the √ and † button to select START, then press the ENTER button begin ripping.
The Ripping menu contain the following buttons :
- Mode (Fast/Normal)
- Bitrate, press ENTER to change : 128kbps ➞ 192kbps ➞ 128kbps.
• Standard : 128kbps
• Better Quality : 192kbps
- Device selection, press ENTER to change between partitions on the USB device (max 4).
- Select - Unselect, press ENTER to change from Select all (files) or Select none.
Note
-To cancel copying in progress, press the ENTER button.
-To return to the CDDA screen, press the TOOLS button again.
-While the CD is being ripped, the player will automatically enter stop mode.
-The ripping process is 2.6 times of normal speed.
-The DVD player can only rip Audio CD (CD DA) discs.
-The USB button does not work while you’re in the Ripping menu.
-CD ripping function may not supported for some MP3 players device.
Picture CD Playback
1. Select the desired folder.
2. Press the π/† buttons to select a Picture file in the clips menu and then press the ENTER button.
Note
- Press the STOP button to return to the clips menu.
- When playing a Kodak Picture CD, the unit displays the Photo directly, not the clips menu.
10
Rotation
Press the TOOLS button to select Rotate, and then press the ENTER button.
Each time the √/® buttons are pressed, the picture rotates 90 degrees clockwise.
Each time the π button is pressed, the picture will reverse to the upside down to show a mirror image.
Each time the † button is pressed, the picture will reverse to the right side to show a mirror image.
-
-
-
-
Zoom
- Press the TOOLS button to select Zoom, and then press the ENTER button.
- Each time ENTER button is pressed, the picture is enlarged. Zoom mode : X1-X2-X3-X4-X1.
Slide Show
- When youpress the PLAY at JPEG file, it will go to full screen mode and automatically slide
show.
Note
- Depending on a file size, the amount of time between each picture may be different from the manual.
- If you don’t press any button, the slide show will start automatically in about 10 seconds by default.
Picture CD Playback for HD-JPEG (Only DVD-D530K/
D530)
Must connect to HDMI. Resolution should be 720p/1080i/ 1080p, and HD-JPEG should be in HD mode.
1.
2.
Select the desired folder.
Press the π/† buttons to select a Picture file in the clip menu and then press the ENTER button.
• Press the STOP (■) button to return to the clips menu.
• When playing a Kodak Picture CD, the unit displays the Photo directly, not the clips menu.
• Rotation
Press the TOOLS button to select Rotate, and then press the ENTER button. Press the √/® button
to rotate the screen 90 degrees to the left/right.
• Zoom
Press the TOOLS button to select Zoom, and then press ENTER.
Each time ENTER button is pressed, the picture is enlarged. Zoom mode : X1-X2-X3-X4-X1.
• Skip Picture
Press the |k or K| button to select previous or next picture.
• Slide Show
Press the PLAY (®) button to start SLIDE function.
Press the PAUSE (∏∏) button to stop SLIDE function. To continue slide show press PLAY button.
Note
- Depending on a file size, the amount of time between each picture may be different from the set
interval time.
- The image may be displayed at a smaller size depending on the picture size when displaying images
in HD-JPEG mode.
- It is recommended to set the “BD Wise” to “Off” In case of playback JPEG image file bigger than
720 X 480 pixel size.
MP3-JPEG Playback
You can play JPEG using music as a backgound.
1. Press the π/† buttons to select an MP3 file in the clips menu and then press the ENTER button.
To return to the menu screen, Press the RETURN or MENU buttons.
2.
3.
Press the √/® buttons to select Photos Menu, and then press the ENTER button.
Press the π/† buttons to select a JPEG file in the clips menu and then press the ENTER button.
- Music will play from the beginning
Press Stop button when you want to stop the playback.
Note
MP3 and JPEG files have to be on the same disc.
CD-R JPEG Disc
- Only files with the “.jpg” and “.JPG” extensions can be played.
- If the disc is not closed, it will take longer to start playing and not all of the recorded files may be
played.
- Only CD-R discs with JPEG files in ISO 9660 or Joliet format can be played.
- The name of the JPEG file may not be longer than 8 characters and should contain no blank spaces
or special characters (. / = +).
- Only a consecutively written multi-session disc can be played. If there is a blank segment in the multisession disc, the disc can be played only up to the blank segment.
- A maximum of 500 images can be stored on a single CD.
- Kodak Picture CDs are recommended.
- When playing a Kodak Picture CD, only the JPEG files in the pictures folder can be played.
- Kodak Picture CD: The JPEG files in the pictures folder can be played automatically.
- Konica Picture CD: If you want to see the Picture, select the JPEG files in the clips menu.
- Fuji Picture CD: If you want to see the Picture, select the JPEG files in the clips menu.
- QSS Picture CD: The unit may not play QSS Picture CD.
- If the number of files in 1 Disc is over 500, only 500 JPEG files can be played.
- If the number of folders in 1 Disc is over 500, only JPEG files in 500 folders can be played.
Karaoke functions (Only DVD-D530K/D360K)
Karaoke Functions
Operation Sequence
1. Connect the terminals Mixed Audio Out to TV or Amplifier.
2. Connect the microphone plug to Mic (microphone) and set Karaoke score to On. When MIC is connected and Karaoke score is On, the karaoke functions can be used.
Echo/Microphone Volume/Key Control (Tone control)
1. Play the karaoke disc containing the songs you want.
‑ Press the KARAOKE (†) button, and then press π/† to select ECHO, VOL or KEY.
2. Press the √/® buttons to change the desired item.
Karaoke Scoring (Score)
The scoring will appear as :
1. The microphone is connected and Karaoke score is On.
2. At the end of each chapter/title of karaoke disc.
- If the DVD karaoke have any information on the scoring drive.
- In case of VCD, the device can not differentiate between hard karaoke or movies, then the scoring will always appear.
3. Karaoke score will appear at the end of time for each chapter/title for about 6s.
Karaoke Sound Recording
1.
2.
3.
4.
Insert USB storage media into USB jack and then connected the microphone plug to Mic.
To star karaoke recording, choose one of VCD/DVD/SVCD file, then press RECORD button.
When recording, user can only press STOP button and PAUSE button to cancel the recording.
If user do cancelation, then file result will be saved.
Note
- If you hear feedback(squealing or howling) while using the karaoke feature, move the microphone
away from the speakers or turn down the microphone volume or the speaker volume.
- When playing MP3, WMA and LPCM disc, the karaoke functions will not operate.
- When the MIC is connected, Digital Out does not work.
- The MIC sound outputs only from Analog Audio Out.
- If MIC is connected to the MIC jack on the front panel, 5.1CH audio will be changed in to 2 CH audio
automatically, this condition can’t be change unless the MIC is plugged out.
Changing setup menu
Using the Setup Menu
The Setup menu lets you customize your DVD player by allowing you to select various language preferences, set up a parental level, even adjust the player to the type of television screen you have.
1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button on the remote control. Press the √/® buttons
to select SETTINGS, then press the ENTER button.
2. Press the π/† buttons to select a Setup Menu, then press the ® or ENTER to bring up the submenu.
3. Press the π/† buttons to select a sub-menu option, then press the ® or ENTER.
4. To make the setup screen disappear after setting up, press the RETURN button.
Setting Up the Display Options
Display options enable you to set various video functions of the player.
1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button. Press the √/® buttons to select SETTINGS,
then press the ENTER button.
2. Press the π/† buttons to select DISPLAY, then press the ® or ENTER button.
3. Press the π/† buttons to select the desired item, then press the ® or ENTER button.
Setting Up the BD Wise (Only DVD-D530K/D530)
When the player is connected to a SAMSUNG TV which supports “BD Wise”,you can enjoy optimized
Picture Quality by setting the “BD Wise” function as “On”.
1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button. Press the √/® buttons to select SETTINGS,
then press the ENTER button.
2. Press the π/† buttons to select DISPLAY, then press the ® or ENTER button.
3. Press the π/† buttons to select BD WISE, then press the ® or ENTER button.
Press the π/† buttons to select ON/OFF, then press the ENTER button.
11
Note
• This option can be changed only when TV support BD Wise.
• Consult your TV User’s Manual to find out if your TV supports Progressive Scan. If
Progressive Scan is supported, follow the TV User’s Manual regarding Progressive Scan settings in the TV’s menu system.
• If Video Output is set incorrectly, the screen may be blocked.
• The resolutions available for HDMI output depend on the connected TV or projector. For
details, see the user’s manual of your TV or projector.
• When the resolution is changed during playback, it may take a few seconds for a normal
image to appear.
• If you set the HDMI output resolution 720p,1080p or 1080i, HDMI output provides better picture quality.
• It is recommended to set the "BD Wise" to "Off" In case of playback JPEG image file bigger
than 720 X 480 pixel size.
Setting Up the Audio Options
Audio Options allows you to setup the audio device and sound status settings depending on the audio
system in use.
1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button. Press the √/® buttons to select SETTING,
then press the ENTER button.
2. Press the π/† buttons to select AUDIO, then press the ® or ENTER button.
3. Press the π/† buttons to select the desired item, then press the ® or ENTER button.
Note :
-When play a disc that has MPEG Audio and you have Bitstream selected in the Audio Options menu,
the Digital Audio jack may not output audio
-There is no analogue audio output when you play a sound disc.
-Even when PCM Down sampling is Off
•Some discs will only output down sampled audio through the digital outputs.
HDMI (Only DVD-D530K/D530)
- If your TV is not compatible with compressed multi-channel formats (Dolby Digital, MPEG), you
should set Digital Audio to PCM.
- If your TV is not compatible with LPCM sampling rates over 48kHz, you should set PCM Down
sam-pling to On.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
12
Setting Up the System Options
1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button. Press the √/® buttons to select SETTINGS,
then press the ENTER button.
2. Press the π/† buttons to select SYSTEM, then press the ® or ENTER button.
3. Press the π/† buttons to select the desired item, then press the ® or ENTER button.
Setting Up the Anynet+(HDMI-CEC) (Only DVD-D530K/D530)
Anynet+ is a function that can be used to operate the unit using a Samsung TV remote control, by
connecting the DVD D530/D530K to a SAMSUNG TV using a HDMI Cable. (This is only available with
SAMSUNG TVs that support Anynet+.
Select On when you connect the DVD D530/D530K with Samsung TV that support Anynet+.
1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button. Press the √/® buttons to select SETTINGS,
then press the ENTER button.
2. Press the π/† buttons to select SYSTEM, then press the ® or ENTER button.
3. Press the π/† buttons to select ANYNET+ (HDMI-CEC), then press the ® or ENTER button.
4. Set the Anynet+(HDMI-CEC) to “On” on your DVD Player, then press the ENTER button.
5. Set the Anynet+ function at your TV. (See the TV instruction manual for more information.).
Note
• By pressing the PLAY button of the unit while watching TV, the TV screen will change to the play
screen.
• If you play a DVD when the TV power is off, the TV will power On.
• If you turn the TV off , the DVD Player will power off automatically.
• If you change the HDMI to other sources (Composite,Component,... etc) in TV while playing the DVD
disc, the DVD Player will stop playing.
Setting Up the Language Features
If you set the player menu, disc menu, audio and subtitle language in advance, they will come up automatically every time you watch a movie.
1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button. Press the √/® buttons to select SETTINGS,
then press the ENTER button.
2. Press the π/† buttons to select LANGUAGE, then press the ® or ENTER button.
3. Press the π/† buttons to select the desired language, then press the ® or ENTER button.
Note
-The language is selected and the screen returns to Language Setup menu.
-To make the setup menu disappear, press the MENU button.
-If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the original pre-recorded language is selected.
-Select “Original” if you want the defaultsoundtrack language to be the original language the disc is
recorded in.
-Select “Automatic” if you want the subtitle language to be the same as the language selected as the
audio language.
-Some discs may not contain the language you select as your initial language; in that case the disc will use
its original language setting.
Setting Up the Security Options
The Parental Control function works in conjunction with DVDs that have been assigned a rating, which
helps you control the types of DVDs that your family watches. There are up to 8 rating levels on a disc.
Setting Up the Rating Level and Changing the Password
1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button. Press the √/® buttons to select SETTINGS,
then press the ENTER button.
2. Press the π/† buttons to select SECURITY, and then press the ® or ENTER button.
Enter your password.
3. Press the π/† buttons to select PARENTAL/CHANGE PASSWORD, and then press the ® or
ENTER button.
4. Press the π/† buttons to select the rating level you want, and then press the ENTER button.
e.g) Setting up in KID SAFE
- For example, if you select the Kids Safe level, discs that contain level 2 or higher will not play.
5. Enter your password. If this is the first time, enter 0000. Then, enter a new password. The new password must be a number other than 0000 to activate the parental control function. Then, re-enter the
new password.
Security Levels :
❶ KID SAFE
❷ G (General Audiences) : All Ages Admitted
❸ PG (Parental Guidance suggested) : Some material may not be suitable for young children.
❹ PG 13 (PG-13 Parents strongly cautioned) : Some material may be inapproriate for children under
13.
❺ PGR (Parental Guidance Recommended) : These are not necessarily unsuitable for children, but
viewer discretion is advised, and parents and guardians are encouraged to supervise younger viewers.
❻ R (Restricted) : Under 17 requires accompanying adult
❼ NC17 (NC-17) : No one 17 and under admitted.
❽ ADULT
Note:
- If you have forgotten your password, see “Forgot Password” in the Troubleshooting Guide.
Reference
Troubleshooting
Before requesting service (troubleshooting), please check the following.
Problem
Action
The screen is blocked.
• Press the ®|| button (in front panel) for more than 5 seconds under no
disc inside. All setting will revert to factory settings.
Forgot password.
• Press the ®|| button (in front panel) for more than 5 seconds under no
disc inside. All setings including the password will revert to the factory
settings. Don't use this unless absolutely necessary.
No HDMI output
• Check the Video output is HDMI enabled.
• Check the connection between the TV and the HDMI jack of DVD player.
• See if the TV supports this 480p/ 576p/720p/1080i/1080p DVD player.
Abnormal HDMI output
screen.
• If snow noise appears on the screen, it means that TV does not
support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection).
HDMI output Jitter
• Check your TV system setup correctly.
• The screen Jitter phenomenon may occur when frame rate is converted from 50Hz to
60 Hz for 720p/1080i/ 1080p HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) Output.
• Please refer to the user's manual of your TV.
Setting Up the General Options
1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button. Press the √/® buttons to select SETTINGS,
then press the ENTER button.
2. Press the π/† buttons to select GENERAL, then press the ® or ENTER button.
3. Press the π/† buttons to select the desired item, then press the ® or ENTER button.
Setting Up the Support Options
Support option enable you to check your DVD player information such as the model code, Software
Version, The serial and version numbers can be found on the back side of your DVD-Player.
1. With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button. Press the √/® buttons to select SETTINGS, then
press the ENTER button.
2. Press the π/† buttons to select SUPPORT, then press the ® or ENTER button.
3. Select PRODUCT INFORMATION, then press the ® or ENTER button.
13
Memo
Spesifications
General
Power Requirements
AC110~240V, 50/60Hz
Power Comsumption
For the power supply and power consumption, refer to the label attached
to the product
Weight
Dimensions
Video Output
+5ºC to +35ºC
Operating Humidity Range
10 % to 75 %
Composite Video
1 channel : 1.0 Vp-p (75 Ω load)
Component Video
Y : 1.0 Vp-p (75 Ω load)
Pr : 0.70 Vp-p (75 Ω load)
Pb : 0.70 Vp-p (75 Ω load)
Output terminal
Maximum Output Level
Frequency Response
Digital Audio Out
14
360mm(W) X 207mm(D) X 42mm(H)
Operating Temperature Range
HDMI
(Only DVD-D530K/DVD-D530)
Audio Output
1.2 Kg
480p, 576p, 720p, 1080p, 1080i
RCA
2Vrms
20 Hz to 20 kHz
Coaxial terminal (S/PDIF)
Memo
Contact SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE
If you have any questions or comments relating to Samsung products, please contact the SAMSUNG customer care center.
Region
North America
Latin America
Europe
CIS
Asia Pacific
Area
Canada
Mexico
U.S.A
Argentine
Brazil
Chile
Nicaragua
Honduras
Costa Rica
Ecuador
El Salvador
Guatemala
Jamaica
Panama
Puerto Rico
Rep. Dominica
Trinidad & Tobago
Venezuela
Colombia
Contact Center 
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
01-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
0800-333-3733
0800-124-421, 4004-0000
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
00-1800-5077267
800-7919267
0-800-507-7267
1-800-10-7267
800-6225
1-800-299-0013
1-800-234-7267
800-7267
1-800-682-3180
1-800-751-2676
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
0-800-100-5303
01-8000112112
Belgium
02 201 2418
Czech Republic
Denmark
Finland
France
Germany
Hungary
Italia
Luxemburg
Netherlands
Norway
Poland
Portugal
Slovakia
Spain
Sweden
U.K
Eire
Austria
800-SAMSUNG (800-726786)
8-SAMSUNG (7267864)
30-6227 515
01 4863 0000
01805-SAMSUNG (726-7864 € 0,14/Min)
06-80-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
02 261 03 710
0900-SAMSUNG (0900-7267864) (€ 0,10/Min)
3-SAMSUNG (7267864)
0 801 1SAMSUNG (172678), 022-607-93-33
80820-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
0800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
902-1-SAMSUNG (902 172 678)
0771 726 7864 (SAMSUNG)
0845 SAMSUNG (7267864)
0818 717 100
0810-SAMSUNG (7267864, € 0.07/min)
Switzerland
0848-SAMSUNG (7267864, CHF 0.08/min)
Russia
Kazakhstan
Uzbekistan
Kyrgyzstan
Tadjikistan
8-800-555-55-55
8-10-800-500-55-500
8-10-800-500-55-500
00-800-500-55-500
8-10-800-500-55-500
Ukraine
8-800-502-0000
Belarus
Moldova
Lithuania
Latvia
Estonia
Australia
New Zealand
China
810-800-500-55-500
00-800-500-55-500
8-800-77777
8000-7267
800-7267
1300 362 603
0800 SAMSUNG (0800 726 786)
400-810-5858, 010-6475 1880
Hong Kong
3698-4698
India
Indonesia
Japan
Malaysia
3030 8282, 1800 110011, 1800 3000 8282
0800-112-8888
0120-327-527
1800-88-9999
1-800-10-SAMSUNG (726-7864), 1-800-3-SAMSUNG (726-7864),
1-800-8-SAMSUNG (726-7864), 02-5805777
1800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
1800-29-3232, 02-689-3232
0800-329-999
1 800 588 889
444 77 11
0860-SAMSUNG (726-7864 )
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864), 8000-4726
Philippines
Middle East &
Africa
Singapore
Thailand
Taiwan
Vietnam
Turkey
South Africa
U.A.E
Web Site
www.samsung.com/ca
www.samsung.com/mx
www.samsung.com/us
www.samsung.com/ar
www.samsung.com/br
www.samsung.com/cl
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com.co
www.samsung.com/be (Dutch)
www.samsung.com/be_fr (French)
www.samsung.com/cz
www.samsung.com/dk
www.samsung.com/fi
www.samsung.com/fr
www.samsung.de
www.samsung.com/hu
www.samsung.com/it
www.samsung.com/lu
www.samsung.com/nl
www.samsung.com/no
www.samsung.com/pl
www.samsung.com/pt
www.samsung.com/sk
www.samsung.com/es
www.samsung.com/se
www.samsung.com/uk
www.samsung.com/ie
www.samsung.com/at
www.samsung.com/ch
www.samsung.com/ch_fr/ (French)
www.samsung.ru
www.samsung.com/kz_ru
www.samsung.com/kz_ru
www.samsung.ua
www.samsung.com/ua_ru
www.samsung.com/lt
www.samsung.com/lv
www.samsung.com/ee
www.samsung.com/au
www.samsung.com/nz
www.samsung.com/cn
www.samsung.com/hk
www.samsung.com/hk_en/
www.samsung.com/in
www.samsung.com/id
www.samsung.com/jp
www.samsung.com/my
www.samsung.com/ph
www.samsung.com/sg
www.samsung.com/th
www.samsung.com/tw
www.samsung.com/vn
www.samsung.com/tr
www.samsung.com/za
www.samsung.com/ae
‫‪DVD-D360K‬‬
‫‪DVD-D530‬‬
‫‪DVD-D530K‬‬
‫ﺠﻬﺎﺰﺸﻐﻳﻝ ﺪﻱﻓﻲﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺩﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻠﻤﺴﺘﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺻﻭّﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻛﺎﻨﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺸﻛﺮﺍ ﻟﻛﻢ ﻋﻟﻰ ﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻨﺗﺞ ﺳﺎﻤﺴﻭﻨﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺴﺗﻼﻡ ﺃﻔﺿﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺪﻣﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭ ﺠﺎﺀ ﺘﺳﺟﻳﻞ ﻤﻧﺗﺧﻛﻡ ﻔﻲ‬
‫‪www.samsung.com/global/register‬‬
‫‪AK68-02046A‬‬
‫ﺍﻠﻌﺭﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺤﺗﻳﺎﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‬‫‪-‬‬
‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻴُﺭﺠﻰ ﺍﻠﺭﺠﻮﻉ ﺇﻠﻰ ﻤﻠﺼﻕ ﺍﻠﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻠﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩ ﺒﺎﻠﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻠﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻤﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻠﻤﺸﻐﻝ ﻠﻤﻌﺭﻔﺔ ﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻠﻔﻮﻠﺘﻳﺔ ﺍﻠﺼﺤﻳﺤﺔ ﻠﻟﺘﺸﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻘﻢ ﺒﺘﺭﻜﻴﺏ ﺍﻠﻤﺸﻐﻝ ﻔﻲ ﺼﻨﺩﻮﻕ ﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺒﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕﺘﻬﻮﻴﺔﻜﺎﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ ٧‬ﺇﻠﻰ ‪ ١٠‬ﺴﻢ( ﺘﺠﺏ ﻋﺩﻢ ﺴﺩ ﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﺘﻬﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻠﺨﺎﺼﺔ ﺒﺄﻱ‬
‫ﻤﻦ ﺍﻠﻤﻜﻮﻨﺎﺕ ﻠﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺒﺩﻭﺭﺍﻦ ﺍﻠﻬﻭﺍﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺘﺠﺐ ﻋﺩﻢ ﺩﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻘﺭﺍﺹ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻴﺩﻮﻳﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻴﺠﺏ ﻋﺩﻢ ﺘﻜﺩﺱ ﺍﻠﻤﻜﻮﻨﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺘﺄﻜﺩ ﻤﻦ ﺇﻴﻘﺎﻑ ﺘﺸﻐﻴﻝ ﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻠﻤﻜﻮﻨﺎﺕ ﻘﺒﻞ ﺘﺤﺭﻴﻚ ﺍﻠﻤﺸﻐﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺘﺄﻜﺩ ﻤﻦ ﺇﻴﻘﺎﻑ ﺘﺸﻐﻴﻝ ﺍﻠﻤﻜﻮﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺨﺭﻯ ﻘﺒﻞ ﺘﻭﺼﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺒﻬﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻠﻤﺸﻐﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺘﺄﻜﺩ ﻤﻦ ﺇﺨﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻠﻘﺭﺹ ﻮﺇﻴﻘﺎﻑ ﺘﺸﻐﻴﻝ ﺍﻠﻤﺸﻐﻝ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻨﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻤﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺴﺘﺧﺩﺍﻢ‪ ،‬ﻮﻻ ﺴﻴﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﻨﺕ ﺘﻌﺘﺰﻢ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﺨﺩﺍﻤﻪ ﻠﻔﺘﺭﺓ ﻄﻮﻴﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺴﺘﺨﺩﺍﻢ ﻤﻘﺒﺱ ﺍﻠﻄﺎﻘﺔ ﺍﻠﺭﺌﻴﺳﻲ ﻜﺠﻬﺎﺰ ﻔﺼﻝ ﻮﻴﺠﺏ ﺃﻦ‬
‫ﻴﻅﺎﻫﺯًﺍﻔﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻮﻘﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻠﺴﻼﻤﺘﻚ‬
‫ ﻴﺴﺘﺧﺩﻢ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻠﻟﻴﺰﺭ‪ .‬ﻮﻘﺩ ﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺴﺘﺧﺩﺍﻢ ﻋﻨﺎﺼﺭ‬‫ﺍﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺘﻌﺩﻼﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻹﺠﺭﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺘﻠﻙ ﺍﻠﻤﺒﻳﻧﺔ ﻫﻧﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺘﻌﺭﺾ ﻠﻺﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺒﺴﻛﻞ ﺧﻄﻴﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺘﺠﺏ ﻋﺩﻢ ﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻷﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﻮﺇﺠﺭﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺼﻼﺡ ﺒﻨﻔﺴﻙ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺘﺭﻚ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻠﺼﻳﺎﻨﺔ ﻠﻔﻧﻴﻳﻦ ﻤﺆﻫﻠﻳﻦ ﻔﻘﻄ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺘﻨﺒﻳﺔ‬
‫‬‫‬‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻠﻢ ﻴﺘﻢ ﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻠﻤﺸﻐﻝ ﻠﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺴﺘﺧﺩﺍﻤﻪ ﻔﻲ ﺃﻏﻲ ﺃﻏﺭ ﺍﺾ ﺼﻨﺎﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻮﻠﻛﻦ ﻷﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﻤﻨﺰﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻠﻼﺴﺘﺧﺩﺍﻢ ﺍﻠﺸﺧﺼﻲ ﻔﻘﻄ‪.‬‬
‫ﻴﺠﺏ ﻋﺩﻢ ﺘﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻠﺠﻬﺎﺰ ﻠﻘﻄﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻠﻤﺎﺀ ﺃﻮ ﺭﺬﺍﺫ ﺍﻠﻤﺎﺀ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻻ‬
‫ﻴﺟﺏ ﺃﻦ ﻴﻮﻀﻊ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺃﺸﻴﺎﺀ ﺘﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺴﻮﺍﺌﻞ ﻤﺛﻝ ﺁﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻠﺰﻫﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻦ ﺘﺆﺛﺭ ﺍﻠﻌﻮﺍﻤﻞ ﺍﻠﺨﺎﺭﺠﻴﺔ ﻜﺈﻠﺒﺭﻖ ﻭﺍﻠﻛﻬﺭﺒﺎﺀ ﺍﻠﺴﺎﻜﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺘﺸﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻠﻄﺒﻳﻌﻲ ﻠﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻠﻤﺸﻐﻝ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻮﺍﺠﻬﺕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻠﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻔﻘﻢ ﺒﺈﻴﻘﺎﻑ ﺘﺸﻐﻴﻝ ﺍﻠﻤﺸﻐﻝ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺩ ﺘﺸﻐﻳﻠﻪ ﺒﺎﻠﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺰﺭ‬
‫‪ ،POWER‬ﺃﻮ ﺍﻔﺼﻝ ﺴﻠﻙ ﺍﻠﺘﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻠﻛﻬﺭﺒﻲ ﺍﻠﻤﺘﺭﺪﺩ ﺜﻢ ﺃﻋﺩ‬
‫ﺘﻮﺼﻴﻠﻪ ﺒﻤﻨﻔﺫ ﺍﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻠﻜﻬﺭﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﺴﻴﻌﻤﻝ ﺍﻠﻤﻐﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻨﺤﻮ ﻄﺒﻳﻌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻔﻲ ﺤﺎﻠﺔ ﺤﺩﻭﺙ ﺘﻜﺎﺜﻑ ﺩﺍﺨﻝ ﺍﻠﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺤﺩﻮﺙ ﺘﻐﻴﻳﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺸﺩﻴﺩﺓ ﻔﻲ ﺩﺭﺠﺎﺕﺍﻠﺤﺭﺍﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺒﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻴﻌﻤﻝ ﺍﻠﻤﺸﻐﻝ ﻔﻲ ﺩﺭﻨﺤﻮ‬
‫ﺴﻠﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻔﻲ ﺤﺎﻠﺔ ﺤﺩﻭﺚ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻠﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺘﺭﻚ ﺍﻠﻤﺸﻐﻝ ﻔﻲ ﺩﺭﺠﺔ‬
‫ﺤﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻠﻐﺭﻔﺔ ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻠﺠﺯﺀ ﺍﻠﺩﺍﺨﻠﻲ ﻤﻦ ﺍﻠﻤﺸﻐﻝ ﺠﺎﻔًﺎ‬
‫ﻮﻤﺴﺘﻌﺩًﺍ ﻠﻠﻌﻤﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺠﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻠﻣﺣﺗﻭﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﻠﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫ ﻴﺠﺏ ﻋﺩﻢ ﺘﻨﻅﻴﻑ ﺍﻠﻘﺭﺹ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﺧﺩﺍﻢ ﻤﻮﺍﺪ ﺍﻠﺭﺵ ﺍﻠﺧﺎﺼﺔ‬‫ﺒﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺒﻨﺰﻴﻦ ﺃﻮ ﺴﺎﺌﻝ ﺘﺧﻔﻴﻑ ﺍﻠﺩﻫﺎﻦ ﺃﻮ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻤﻦ ﺍﻠﻤﺫﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﻤﺘﻃﺎﻴﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻮﺍﻠﺘﻲ ﻘﺩ ﺘﺗﺴﺒﺏ ﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺤﺩﻮﺚ ﺘﻠﻑ ﺒﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻠﻘﺭﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻴﺠﺏ ﻋﺩﻢ ﻠﻤﺱ ﺴﻄﺢ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﻘﺭﺹ‪ .‬ﺍﻤﺴﻚ ﺍﻠﻘﺭﺹ ﻤﻦ‬‫ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻠﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﻮﺍﻠﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻠﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺒﺎﻠﻤﻧﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺘﺭﺒﺔ ﺒﺭﻔﻖ ﻮﻻ ﺘﻘﻢ ﻪﻄﻠﻘﹰﺎ ﺍﻠﻤﺴﺢ ﻤﺴﺘﺧﺩﻤﹰﺎ ﻘﻄﻌﺔ‬‫ﻘﻤﺎﺶ ﺫﻫﺎﺒًﺎ ﻮﺇﻴﺎﺒًﺎ ﻔﻮﻕ ﺍﻠﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ە‪ .‬ﺍﻠﻤﻠﻮﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﺒﻳﺌﻴﺔ‬
‫ ﺘﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻠﺒﻃﺎﺭﻴﺔ ﺍﻠﻤﺴﺘﺧﺩﻤﺔ ﻔﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﻜﻴﻤﺎﻮﻴﺔ‬‫ﻀﺎﺭﺓ ﺒﺎﻠﺒﻳﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻠﺫﺍ‪ ،‬ﻴُﺭﺠﻰ ﺍﻠﺘﺧﻠﺹ ﻤﻦ ﺍﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﺘﺎﺕ ﺒﺎﻠﻄﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻠﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻮﻔﻘًﺎ‬‫ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺍﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﻠﻔﻳﺩﺭﺍﻠﻳﺔ ﻮﺍﻠﺩﻮﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻠﻤﺤﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻮﺤﺩﺓ ﺍﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻠﻤﺭﻔﻘﺔ ﺒﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻠﺩﻠﻳﻝﻤﺭﺨﺼﺔ ﻭﻔﻘًﺎ ﻠﺤﻘﻮﻖ ﻤﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻔﻛﺭﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻠﺸﺭﻜﺎﺕ ﺃﻄﺭﺍﻑ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻴﻘﺘﺼﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻠﺘﺭﺨﻳﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺴﺘﺨﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻠﺨﺎﺹ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻠﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻄﺔ ﺍﻠﻌﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻠﻨﻬﺎﺌﻲ ﺍﻠﻤﻨﺘﻔﻊ ﻤﻦ ﺍﻠﻤﺤﺘﻭﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻠﻤُﺭﺨﺼﺔ‪ .‬ﻮﻻ ﺘﻮﺠﺩ ﺤﻘﻭﻖ ﻤﻣﻨﻭﺤﺔ ﻻﺴﺘﺧﺩﺍﻢ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻠﺠﻬﺎﺰ ﻷﻏﺭﺍﺾ‬
‫ﺘﺠﺎﺭﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻴﻐﻄﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻠﺘﺭﺨﻳﺹ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ ﺒﺧﻼﻑ ﻫﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻠﻮﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻜﻨﻟﻚ ﻻ ﻴﺸﻤﻝ ﺍﻠﺘﺭﺨﻳﺹ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺭ‬
‫ﻤﺭﺨﺼﺔ ﺘﻃﺎﺒﻕ ‪ ISO/OUR 11172-3‬ﺃﻮ ‪ISO/OUR 13818-3‬‬
‫ﺍﻠﺘﺭﺨﻳﺹ ﻔﻘﻄ ﺍﺴﺘﺨﺩﻢ ﺃﻢ ﺘﺒﺎﻉ ﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺒﻮﺤﺩﺓ ﺍﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻠﺤﺎﻠﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻜﺫﻠﻚ ﻴﻐﻄﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻠﺘﺭﺨﻳﺹ ﻔﻘﻃ ﺍﺴﺘﺧﺩﺍﻢ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻠﺤﺎﻠﻴﻪ ﻠﺘﺷﻔﻴﺭ ﻮ‪/‬ﺃﻮ ﻔﻚ ﺘﺸﻔﻴﺭ‬
‫ﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺕ ﺍﻠﺘﻲ ﺘﺗﻄﺎﺒﻖ ﻤﻊ ‪ ISO/OUR 11172-3‬ﺃﻮ‬
‫‪ .ISO/OUR 13818-3‬ﻠﻢ ﻴﻨﻢ ﻤﻨﺢ ﺤﻘﻮﻖ ﺒﻤﻮﺠﺏ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻠﺘﺭﺨﻴﺹ ﻔﻴﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻴﺘﻌﻠﻕ ﺒﻤﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻮ ﻮﻅﺎﺌﻔﻪ ﺍﻠﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺘﻃﺎﺒﻖ ‪ISO/OUR 11172-3‬‬
‫ﺃﻮ ‪.ISO/OUR 13818-3‬‬
‫ﺘﻧﺒﻴﻪ ‪ :‬ﻘﺩ ﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺴﺘﺧﺩﺍﻢ ﺃﺰﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻮ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻠﺿﺒﻄ‬
‫ﺃﻮ ﺘﻨﻔﻴﺫ ﺇﺠﺭﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺒﺧﻼﻑ ﺍﻠﻮﺍﺭﺪﺓ ﺒﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻠﺪﻠﻴﻝ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺘﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻠﻺﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻠﺧﻄﻴﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻳﺎﻃﺎﺖ ‪٢...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺪ‬
‫ﻤﻳﺯﺍﺖ ﻋﺎﻤﺔ ‪٢..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻠﻭﺼﻒ ‪٣.......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺴﺗﻜﺷﺎﻒ ﻭﺤﺩﺓﺍﻠﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﹸﻌﺩ ‪٣..............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻠﺘﻭﺻﻳﻼﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺨﺘﻴﺎﺮ ﺇﺤﺪﻯ ﺍﻠﺘﻭﺼﻴﻼﺖ ‪٤....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻠﻭﻈﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺴﺎﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺘﺷﻐﻳﻞ ﺍﻠﻘﺭﺺ‪٥................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺴﺘﺨﺪﺍﻢ ﻭﻅﻴﻓﺘﻲ ﺍﻠﺑﺤﺕ ﻭﺍﻠﺛﺧﻄﻲ‪٥...........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺴﺘﺧﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻠﻌﺭﺾ‪٦......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺴﺘﺨﺪﺍﻢ ﻘﺎﺌﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﻠﻌﻧﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﻷﻘﺭﺍﺺ ‪٦........................................‬‬
‫ﺘﻛﺭﺍﺮ ﺍﻠﺘﺷﻐﻴﻞ‪٦................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻠﺗﺷﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻠﺑﻄﻲﺀ ‪٦..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻠﻭﻈﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻠﺗﻗﺪﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻄ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻓﺎﻉ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻌﺭﺽ )‪٦.........................(EZ VIEW‬‬
‫ﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻠﺻﻭﺖ‪٧............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻴﺪ ﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻠﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻠﺼﺎﺤﺑﺔ‪٧.................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺰﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻠﻛﺎﻤﻴﺭﺍ ‪٧.........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺴﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻠﻌﻼﻤﺎﺖ ‪٧....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺴﺗﺧﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻆﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻠﺗﻛﺑﻴﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻠﺘﺼﻐﻳﺭ‪٧.............................................‬‬
‫ﻘﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﻤﻘﺎﻄﻊ ﻤﻠﻔﺎﺖ ‪/MPEG4/JPEG/WMA/MP3‬ﻗﺭﺺ ﺍﻠﺿﻐﻭﻄ‪٧...‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻴﺩ ﺍﻨﺟﻠﺪ ‪٧...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺼﻭﺕ ‪/WMA/MP3‬ﺍﻠﻗﺭﺺ ﺍﻠﻣﻁﻐﻮﻃ ‪٧..........................‬‬
‫ﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪٨........................................................... MPEG4‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺖ ﺍﻠﻭﺳﺎﺋﻄ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﺧﺪﺍﻢ ﻤﻳﺯﺓ ﻤﺿﻴﻒ ‪٩..................... USB‬‬
‫ﺍﻠﻧﺴﺦ ﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﹸﺪﻣﹶﺞ ‪٩.................................................‬‬
‫ﺘﺷﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻠﻘﺭﺺ ﺍﻠﺫﻱ ﻴﺗﺿﻤﻦ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪٩.........................................‬‬
‫ﺘﺷﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻠﻘﺭﺺ ﺍﻠﺫﻱ ﻴﺗﺿﻤﻦ ﺻﻭ ‪JPEG-HD‬‬
‫)‪١٠..................................... (DVD-D530K/DVD-D530‬‬
‫ﻭﻃﺎﺌﻑ ﻜﺎﺭﻭﻜﻲ )‪(DVD-D530K/DVD-D360K‬‬
‫ﻭﻃﺎﺌﻑ ﻜﺎﺭﻭﻜﻲ‪١٠............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻳﻄ ‪Setup Menu‬‬
‫ﺍﺴﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪١١.................................................Setup Menu‬‬
‫ﻀﺑﻄ ﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺖ ﺍﻠﻌﺭﺽ ‪١١....................................................‬‬
‫ﻀﺑﻄ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺖ ﺍﻠﺻﻭﺖ ‪١١....................................................‬‬
‫ﻀﺑﻄ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺖ ﺍﻠﻨﻅﺎﻢ‪١١.......................................................‬‬
‫ﻀﺑﻄ ﻤﻴﺯﺍﺖ ﺍﻠﻟﻐﺔ ‪١٢.........................................................‬‬
‫ﻀﺑﻄ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺖ اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ‪١٢.....................................................‬‬
‫ﻀﺑﻄ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺖ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‪١٢.......................................................‬‬
‫ﻀﺑﻄ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺖ ﺍﻠﺩﻋﻢ ‪١٢.......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻠﻣﺭﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺴﺘﻛﺷﺎﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﻃﺎﺀ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺤﻬﺎ‪١٣.............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻠﻤﻭﺍﺼﻔﺎﺖ ‪١٣.................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺺﻭﺕ ﻤﻣﺗﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺘﻣﻧﺢ ﺘﻗﻧﻳﺔ ‪ Dolby Digital‬ﻮﻫﻲ ﺘﻗﻧﻳﺔ ﺘﻡ ﺘﻃﻭﻴﺭﻫﺎ ﻤﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺸﺭﻜﺔ‬
‫‪ Dolby Laboratories‬ﺺﻭﺘﺎ ﻔﺎﺒﻕ ﺍﻠﻭﻀﻭﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻠﺷﺎﺸﺔ‬
‫ﻴﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺼﻭﺭ ﺍﻠﺸﺎﺸﺔ ﺍﻠﻌﺭﻴﺿﺔ )‪ (٩:١٦‬ﻮﺍﻠﻌﺎﺩﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻰ ﺤﺩ ﺴﻭﺍﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻜﺔ ﺍﻠﺑﻃﻳﺋﺔ‬
‫ﻴﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﺤﺩ ﺍﻠﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻠﻬﺎﻤﺔ ﺒﺎﻠﺤﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻠﺑﻃﺋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺘﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪(DVD-D530K/DVD-D530) 1080p‬‬
‫ﻴﺣﻭﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻠﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻠﻌﺎﺪﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺠﻬﺯﺓ ﺘﻠﻳﻓﺯﻴﻭﻥ ﺘﻌﻣﻝ‬
‫ﺒﺩﻗﺔ ‪.1080p‬‬
‫ﺘﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻵﺒﺎﺀ )‪(DVD‬‬
‫ﺘﺗﻳﺢﻭﻆﻳﻔﺔ ﺘﺤﻛﻡ ﺍﻵﺒﺎﺀ ﻠﻠﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻤﻳﻥ ﻀﺑﻁ ﺍﻠﻤﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻠﻼﺯﻡ ﻠﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﻝ‬
‫ﻤﻥ ﻤﺷﺎﻫﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻔﻼﻢ ﺍﻠﺿﺎﺭﺓ ﻜﺘﻠﻙ ﺍﻠﺗﻲ ﺒﻬﺎ ﻤﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻋﻧﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺗﻲ ﺘﺗﻧﺎﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺃﺤﺩ ﺍﻠﻣﻭﻀﻭ ﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﺧﺎﺼﺔ ﺒﺎﻠﻛﺒﺎﺭ ﻮﻤﺎ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺫﻠﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺌﻑ ﻘﺎﺌﻣﺔ ﺍﻠﺸﺎﺸﺔ ﺍﻠﻣﺗﻌﺪﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻴﻣﻛﻦ ﺍﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻠﻌﺩﻴﺩ ﻤﻦ ﺒﻳﻦ ﺍﻠﻟﻐﺎﺕ )ﺍﻠﺗﺭﺠﻣﺔ ﺍﻠﻣﺼﺎﺤﺒﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺕ( ﻭﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻠﺷﺎﺸﺔ ﺃﺜﻧﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺴﺘﺎﻉ ﺒﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻔﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺴﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻠﻣﺗﻗﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺘﻌﻣﻝ ﻤﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻻﺴﺗﻌﺭ ﺍﺾ ﺍﻠﻣﺘﻗﺪﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻨﺷﺎﺀ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﻤﺤﺳﻧﺔ ﺬﺍﺕ ﺨﻃﻮﻄ‬
‫ﺍﺴﺘﻌﺭ ﺍﺾ ﻀﻌﻑ ﺨﻄﻭﻄ ﺍﻻﺴﺘﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻠﺧﺎﺼﺔ ﺒﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻤﺘﺩﺍﺧﻟﺔ ﺘﻗﻠﻳﺪﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪EZ VIEW (DVD‬‬
‫ﻴﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻠﻌﺭﺾ ﺍﻠﺳﻬﻝ ﻀﺒﻄ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺒﺧﻳﺚ ﺘﺗﻨﺎﺴﺏ ﻤﻊ ﺤﺟﻢ ﺸﺎﺸﺔ‬
‫‪ ٩:١٦‬ﺃﻭ ‪.(٣:٤‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺍﺭﺾ ﺍﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻠﻔﻮﺘﻮﻏﺭﺍﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻠﺭﻘﻤﻴﺔ )‪(JPEG‬‬
‫ﺘﺳﺗﻃﻳﻊ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺼﻭﺭ ﻔﻭﺘﻭﻏﺭ ﺍﻔﻳﺔ ﺭﻘﻣﻳﺔ ﻋﻟﻰ ﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻠﺗﻟﻳﻔﺯﻴﻭﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪Repeat‬‬
‫ﻴﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺘﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﻏﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻔﻳﻠﻢ ﺒﻣﺠﺭﺩ ﺍﻠﺿﻐﻃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.REPEAT‬‬
‫‪MP3/WMA‬‬
‫ﻴﻣﻛﻦ ﻠﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻠﻭﺤﺩﺓ ﺘﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻘﺭ ﺍﺹ ﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅ ﻫﺎ ﻤﻥ ﻤﻟﻔﺎﺕ ‪.MP3/WMA‬‬
‫‪MPEG4‬‬
‫ﻴﺳﺘﻄﻳﻊ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺘﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻠﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺘﻧﺳﻴﻕ ‪ MPEG4‬ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻤﻟﻑ ‪.AVI‬‬
‫‪) HDMI‬ﻮﺍﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻠﻭﺴﺎﺌﻄ ﺍﻠﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻠﻭﻀﻭﺡ(‬
‫)‪(DVD-D530K/DVD-D530‬‬
‫ﺘﻌﻣﻝ ﻮﺍﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻠﻭﺴﺎﺌﻄ ﺍﻠﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻠﻭﻀﻭﺡ ‪ HDMI‬ﻋﺎﻰ ﺘﻗﻟﻳﻝ ﺘﺷﻭﻴﺶ‬
‫ﺍﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﻤﻦ ﺨﻼﻝ ﺍﻠﺳﻣﺎﺡ ﺒﻭﺠﻭﺩ ﻤﺳﺎﺭﺓ ﻔﻴﺩﻴﻭ‪/‬ﺼﻭﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻳﺔ ﺃﻜﺛﺭ ﻨﻗﺎﺀً ﻤﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻠﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺘﻟﻴﻔﺯﻴﻭﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﮟﺹ ﺍﻟﻤُﺪﻣَﺞ‬
‫ﺘﺗﻳﺢ ﻠﻙ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻠﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻨﺳﺦ ﻤﻟﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻠﻗﺮﺹ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺒﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪) .MP3‬ﺍﻷﻘﺭﺍﺹ ﺍﻠﻣﺩﻤﺟﺔ ﺍﻠﺻﻭ ﺘﻳﺔ ﻔﻗﻁ )‪.((CD DA‬‬
‫ﻤﻼﺤﻆﺔ‬
‫ ﺍﻷﻘﺭﺍﺹ ﺍﻠﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺘﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻤﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻠﻤﺴﻐﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ‪DVD-RAM‬‬
‫• ‪DVD-ROM‬‬
‫• ‪CDV‬‬
‫• ‪CD-ROM‬‬
‫• ‪CVD‬‬
‫• ‪CDI‬‬
‫ ﺭﺒﻤﺎ ﺘﺗﻭﻘﻑ ﺍﻠﻘﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺘﺴﻐﻴﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻅﺭﻮﻑ ﺍﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ‪ DVD-R‬ﺃﻭ ‪DVD+R‬‬
‫• ‪CD-RW‬‬
‫• ﺃﻘﺭﺍﺹ ‪ DVD+RW‬ﺃﻮ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻮﺿﻊ ‪(V‬‬
‫ ﻘﺩ ﺘﺗﻣﻛﻦ ﺍﻠﻮﺣﺩﺓ ﻤﻦ ﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺒﻌﺽ ﺃﻘﺭﺇﺹ ‪ CD-R‬ﻮ ‪CD-RW‬‬‫ﻮ ‪ DVD-R‬ﺘﺴﺒﺏ ﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻠﻘﺭﺹ ﺃﻭ ﻅﺭﻮﻑ ﺍﻠﺘﺴﺠﻳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫~‬
‫‪PAL‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺿﺪ اﻟﻨﺴﺦ وﻫﻲ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺣﻘﻮق اﻟﺒﺮ‬
‫اءات وﺣﻘﻮق اﻟﻤﻠﻜﻴﺔ اﻟﻔﻜﺮﻳﺔ اﻷﺧﺮى ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎت اﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪة اﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫وﻜﺬﻟﻚ ﺣﻘﻮق ﺷﺮﻜﺔ ‪ .ROVI‬ﻳُﻤﻨﻊ ﻣﻨﻌﺎً ﺑﺎﺗﺎً اﻟﻘﻴﺎم ﺑﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻜﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫أو اﻟﺘﻔﻜﻴﻚ‬
‫ﻤﺨﺭﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺴﺘﻌﺭﺍﺾ ﺍﻠﻤﺘﻘﺩﻢ )‪(576p‬‬
‫"ﻴﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻤﺴﺘﻠﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﻨﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺍﻴﺴﺖ ﻜﻞ ﺃﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻠﺘﻠﻔﺎﺰﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺠﺔ ﺍﻠﻮﻀﻮﺡ ﺍﻠﻌﺎﻠﻴﺔ ﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤًﺎ ﻤﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻘﺩ ﺘﺗﺴﺒﺏ ﻔﻲ ﻅﻬﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﻤﺭﺌﻴﺔ ﻔﻲ ﺍﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻔﻲ ﺤﺎﻠﺔ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻔﻲ ﺼﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺴﺘﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻠﻤﺘﻘﺩﻢ ﻔﻲ ﺍﻠﻮﺿﻌﻳﻦ ‪ 576‬ﻴُﻮﺼﻰ ﺃﻦ ﻴﻘﻮﻢ ﺍﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺩﻢ‬
‫ﺒﺘﺒﺩﻴﻞ ﺍﻠﻮﺼﻠﺔ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺨﺭﺝ "ﺇﻠﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻠﻘﻴﺎﺴﻲ"‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﻠﺩﻴﻚ ﺃﻴﺔ ﺍﺴﺌﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺘﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺒﺘﻮﺍﻔﻕ ﺠﻬﺎﺰ ﺍﻠﺘﻠﻔﺎﺰ ﻤﻊ ﻫﺩﺍ ﺍﻠﻄﺭﺍﺰ ﻤﻦ ﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻘﺭﺍﺹ‬
‫‪ ،DVD 576p‬ﻴُﺭﺠﻰ ﺍﻻﺘﺼﺎﻞ ﺒﻤﺮﻜﺰ ﺨﺩﻤﺔ ﺍﻠﻌﻤﻼﺀ ﺍﻠﺨﺎﺹ ﺒ‬
‫‪".SAMSUNG‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺘﺤﻛﻡ ﺍﻠﻟﻭﺤﺔ ﺍﻷﻤﺎﻤﻳﺔ‬
‫‪DVD-D530‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٣٤‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻘﺭﺹ ﺩﻮﻠﺒﻲ ﺍﻠﺭﻘﻤﻲ‬
‫‪STEREO‬‬
‫‪STEREO‬‬
‫ﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﺴﺘﺭﻴﻮ‬
‫‪DIGITAL‬‬
‫‪SOUND‬‬
‫ﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻠﺭﻘﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻠﺤﻤﺎﻴﺔ ﻤﻦ ﺍﻠﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﺍﻠﻌﺩﻴﺩ ﻤﻦ ﺃﻘﺭﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻠﻤﺰﻮﺩﺓ ﺒﺸﻔﺭﺓ ﻠﻟﺤﻤﺎﻴﺔ ﻩﻦ ﺍﻠﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻮﻠﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻠﺴﺒﺏ‪ ،‬ﻴﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻔﻘﻄ ﺘﻮﺼﻴﻞ ﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻘﺭﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺒﺟﻬﺎﺰ ﺍﻠﺘﻠﻔﺎﺰ ﻮﻠﻴﺲ ﺒﺄﺣﺩ ﺃﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻠﻔﻴﺩﻴﻭ‪ .‬ﺤﻳﺚ ﻴﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺘﻭﺼﻴﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻠﻮﺤﺪﺓ ﺒﺠﻬﺎﺰ ﻔﻴﺩﻴﻮ ﻅﻬﻮﺭ ﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻤﺸﻭﻫﺔ ﻤﻦ ﺃﻘﺭﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻠﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻀﺩ ﺍﻠﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻤﺰ ﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻨﻅﺎﻢ ﺒﺚ ‪ PAL‬ﻔﻲ ﺍﻠﻤﻣﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺩﺓ ﻮﻔﺭﻨﺴﺎ‬
‫ﻮﺃﻠﻤﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﻮﻤﺎ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺫﻠﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻠﻮﺼﻑ‬
‫‪DVD-D360K‬‬
‫‪DVD-D530K‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٣٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﻘﺭﺹ ‪MP3‬‬
‫ﺮﻘﻢ ﺍﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺭ‬
‫ﻴﺘﻢ ﺘﺭﻤﻳﺰ ﻜﻞ ﻤﻦ ﺃﻘﺭﺍﺹ ﻮﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻘﺭﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺤﺴﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻮﻻﺒﺩ ﺃﻦ ﺘﺗﻮﺍﻔﻕ ﺭﻤﻮﺰ ﺍﻠﻤﻨﺎﻄﻕ ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺘﺸﻐﻴﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻠﻘﺭﺹ‪ .‬ﻔﻲ ﺤﺎﻠﺔ ﻋﺩﻢ ﺘﻮﺍﻔﻕ ﺍﻠﺭﻤﻮﺰ‪ ،‬ﻠﻦ ﻴﺘﻢ ﺘﺸﻐﻳﻞ ﺍﻠﻘﺭﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻮﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻠﻌﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻤﺯ ﺍﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻠﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻠﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻟﻭﺤﺔ ﺍﻠﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ‪DivX‬‬
‫ﺘﻌﺩ‪ DivX‬ﻮ ‪DiVX Certified‬‬
‫‬
‫ﺍ ‪ .‬ﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻘﺭﺍﺹ‬
‫ﻀﻊ ﺍﻠﻗﺭﺹ ﻫﻨﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪DISPLAY .٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻌﻁ ﻋﻟﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ﻠﻓﺗﺢﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻘﺭﺍﺹ ﻭﺇﻏﻼﻘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪OPEN/CLOSE ( ) .٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻌﻁ ﻋﻟﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ﻠﻓﺗﺢﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻘﺭﺍﺹ ﻭﺇﻏﻼﻘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪STOP( ) .٤‬‬
‫ﻹﻴﺎﻑ ﺘﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻠﻗﺭﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻚ اﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮى اﻟﻤﺘﻤﻴﺰ‪“.‬‬
‫ﻤﻐﻂﻲ ﺒﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺃﻭﺃﻜﺛﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺒﺭﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺨﺗﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻤﺭﻴﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫‪7,519,274 ،7,515,710 ،7,460,668 ، : 7295673‬‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫‪DVD-D530‬‬
‫‪DVD-D360K‬‬
‫‪ ،DivXNetwork, Inc‬ﻮﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺴﺘﺧﺩﺍﻤﻬﺎ ﺒﻤﻮﺠﺏ‬
‫ﺘﺭﺨﻴﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺴﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﻭﺤﺩﺓﺍﻠﺗﺣﻛﻢ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻮﺍﻠﺸﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻠﻤﺭﺘﺒﻄﺔ ﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻼﻤﺎﺕ ﺘﺠﺎﺭﻴﺔ ﻠﺸﺭﻜﺔ‬
‫“ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ DivX‬ﻣﺮﺧﺺ ﻟﻪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ‪،DivX‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫) ( ‪PLAY/PAUSE‬‬
‫ﻟﺑﺩﺀ ﺘﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻠﻗﺭﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻴﻗﺎﻑ ﺘﺷﻐﻳﻟﻪ ﻤﺆﻗﺗًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫( ‪POWER ON/OFF‬‬
‫)‬
‫ﻘﻡ ﺒﺎﻠﺗﺷﻐﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻴﻗﺎﻑ ﺍﻠﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺴﻳﺗﻡ ﺘﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻴﻗﺎﻑ ﺘﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻠﻣﺷﻐﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻤﺿﻳﻑ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺘﻭﺼﻳﻝ ﻜﺎﻤﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻠ�ﺎﺒﺗﺔ ﺍﻠﺭﻘﻣﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻤﺷﻐﻝ ‪ MP3‬ﺃﻭ ﺒﻃﺎﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻠﺫﺍﻜﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻘﺎﺭﺊ ﺍﻠﺑﻃﺎﻘﺔ ﺃﻮ ﻭﺤﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻠﺗﺧﺯﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﺨﺭﻯ ﺍﻠﻗﺎﺒﻟﺔ ﻠﻺﺯﺍﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪(DVD-D530K/DVD-D360K) MIC‬‬
‫ﻠﺗﻭﺼﻳﻝ ﺍﻠﻳﻛﺭﻭﻔﻭﻥ ﻠﺗﺛﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﺎﺌﻑ ﻜﺎﺭﻭﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫‪DVD-D530K‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫‪٢٩‬‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ POWER‬ﻠﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﺃﻘﺭﺍﺹ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﻠﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻠﻭﺤﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻴﻗﺎﻑ ﺘﺷﻐﻳﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺯﺭ ‪(DVD-D530K/DVD-D530) DVD‬‬
‫ﺍﻀﻐﻃ ﻋﻟﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺴﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻤﺷﻐﻝ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺯﺭ ‪(DVD-D530K/DVD-D530) TV‬‬
‫‬
‫ﺍﻀﻐﻃ ﻋﻟﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ﻠﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻠﺗﻟﻓﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺯﺭ ‪EZ VIEW‬‬
‫)‪(DVD-D530K/DVD-D530‬‬
‫ﻴﻣﻛﻥ ﻀﺑﻁ ﻨﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺘﻓﺎﻉ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻌﺭﺽ ﺒﺳﻬﻭﻠﺔ ﻮﻔﻗًﺎ ﻠﺤﺟﻡ‬
‫ﺸﺎﺸﺔ ﺍﻠﺗﻟﻳﻓﺯﻴﻭﻥ )‪ ٩:١٦‬ﺃﻭ ‪.(٣:٤‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻠﻌﻼﻤﺔ )‪(MARKER‬‬
‫‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺯﺭ ‪REPEAT‬‬
‫ﻴﺘﻳﺢ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ﺘﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺘﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻔﺻﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﻤﺳﺟﻟﺔ‬
‫‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻘﺭﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺯﺭ ‪DISC MENU‬‬
‫‬
‫ﻻﻈﻬﺎﺭ ﻘﺎﺌﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺭﺍﺹ‬
‫‪ .٨‬ﺯﺭ ‪ (DVD-D530K/DVD-D360K) RECORD‬‬
‫ﺘﺳﺗﺧﺩﻢ ﻟﻟﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺒﻂﺭ ﻴﻗﺔ ﻜﺎﺭﻴﻭ ﻜﻲ‬
‫‬
‫‪ .٩‬ﺯﺭ )‪) TV VOL (+, -‬ﺍﻠﺯﻴﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻠﺗﺧﻓﻳﺽ(‬
‫)‪(DVD-D530K/DVD-D530‬‬
‫‬
‫ﺍﻠﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻔﻲ ﻤﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻠﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫‪ .١٠‬ﺯﺭﺍ ‪(|k/K|) SKIP‬‬
‫‬
‫ﻴﺳﺗﺧﺩﻤﺎﻥ ﻠﺗﺧﻃﻲ ﺍﻠﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻠﻓﺻﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﻣﻟﺩﺓ ﺍﻠﻤﺳﺟﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١١‬ﺯﺭ ‪(˚) STOP‬‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‪ .١٢‬ﺯﺭ ‪MENU‬‬
‫ﻹﻈﻬﺎﺭ ﻘﺎﺌﻣﺔ ﻤﺷﻐﻝ ﺃﻘﺭﺍﺹ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫‪ .١٣‬ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ENTER √/® π/†/‬‬
‫ﻴﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ﻜﻣﻓﺗﺎﺡ ﺘﺑﺩﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‬
‫‪ .١٤‬ﺯﺭ ‪TOOLS‬‬
‫‬
‫ﻠﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﻀﻊ ﺍﻠﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻠﺣﺎﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﻌﺮض ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ .١٥‬ﺯﺭ ) ( ‪OPEN/CLOSE‬‬
‫‬
‫ﻠﻓﺗﺢ ﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻘﺭﺍﺹ ﻭﺇﻏﻼﻘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١٦‬ﺯﺭ ‪HDMI SEL.‬‬
‫)‪(DVD-D530K/DVD-D530‬‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫ﻠﺿﺑﻃ ﺪﻘﺔ ﺨﺭﺝ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫‪ .١٧‬ﺯﺭ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫‬
‫‪ .١٨‬ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪VIDEO SEL.‬‬
‫‬
‫ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻭﻀﻊ ﺨﺭﺝ ﺍﻠﻓﻳﺩﻴﻭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١٩‬ﺯﺭ ‪REPEAT A-B‬‬
‫)‪(DVD-D530K/DVD-D530‬‬
‫‪ .٢٠‬ﺯﺭ ‪INFO‬‬
‫‪.‬ﻜﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ أﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض )‪.(Display‬‬
‫‪ .٢١‬ﺯﺭ ‪TITLE MENU‬‬
‫‬
‫ﻻﻈﻬﺎﺭ ﻘﺎﺌﻣﺔ ﺍﻠﻌﻧﺎﻭﻴﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢٢‬ﺯﺭ ‪TV SOURCE/AUDIO‬‬
‫ﺍﺴﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻠﻟﻭﺼﻭﻝ ﺇﻠﻰ ﻭﻆﺎﺌﻑ ﺍﻠﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻠﻣﺗﻌﺩﺪﺓ ﺍﻠﻣﻭﺠﻭﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻟﻰ ﺍﻠﻗﺭﺹ‪.‬ﺍﻨﻗﺭ ﻋﻟﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ﻻﺨﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻤﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻠﺗﻟﻓﺎﺫ ﺍﻠﻣﺗﺎﺡ ‬
‫)ﻭﻀﻊ ﺍﻠﺗﻟﻓﺎﺯ(‪.‬‬
‫‬
‫‪ .٢٣‬ﺯﺭ ‪(∏∏)PAUSE‬‬
‫)‪(DVD-D530K/DVD-D530‬‬
‫ﺇﻴﻗﺎﻑ ﺍﻠﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻠﻣﺅﻘﺕ ﻠﻟﻗﺭﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢٤‬ﺯﺭﺍ ‪(k/K) SEARCH‬‬
‫‬
‫ ﻴﺗﻳﺣﺎﻥ ﻠﻙ ﺍﻠﺑﺣﺙ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺌﻷﻤﺎﻡ‪/‬ﺍﻠﺧﻟﻑ ﺨﻼﻝ ﺍﻠﻗﺭﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢٥‬ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪) TV CH (P, Q‬ﻘﻧﺎﺓ ﺍﻠﺗﻟﻓﺎﺯ(‬
‫)‪(DVD-D530K/DVD-D530‬‬
‫ﺘﺣﺩﻴﺩ ﺍﻠﻗﻧﺎﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‬
‫‪ .٢٦‬ﺯﺭ )®(‪PLAY ( )/‬‬
‫ﻠﺑﺩﺀ ﺍﻠﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢٧‬ﺯﺭ ‪RETURN‬‬
‫ﻠﻟﺭﺠﻭﻉ ﺇﻠﻰ ﻘﺎﺌﻣﺔ ﺴﺎﺒﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢٨‬ﺯﺭ )‪SUBTITLE (π‬‬
‫‪ .٢٩‬ﺯﺭ ‪) EXIT‬ﺨﺭﻭﺝ(‬
‫)‪(DVD-D530K/DVD-D530‬‬
‫ﻠﻟﺧﺭﻭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻠﻗﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﺍﻠﺗﻲ ﺘﻆﻬﺭ ﺍﻠﻰ ﻠﺷﺎﺸﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣٠‬ﺯﺭ ‪(†) KARAOKE‬‬
‫‬
‫)‪(DVD-D530K/DVD-D360K‬‬
‫ﻟﻟﻭﺼﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻘﺎﺌﻣﺔ ﻜﺎﺭﻴﻭﻜﻲ‪(echo، mic vol ،keycon).‬‬
‫ﺍﻠﺗﻭﺼﻳﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺨﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﺤﺩﻯ ﺍﻠﺗﻭﺼﻴﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺘﻌﺭﺾ ﺍﻠﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺘﻭﺼﻳﻼﺕ ﺸﺎﺌﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺴﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻠﺘﻭﺼﻳﻝ ﻤﺷﻐﻝ ﺍﻘﺭﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺒﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻠﺗﻟﻓﺎﺯ ﻭ ﺍﻠﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺖ ﺍﻷﺨﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻘﺒﻝ ﺘﻭﺼﻳﻝ ﻤﺷﻐﻝ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ ﺘﺄﻜﺩ ﺩﺍﺌﻣًﺎ ﻤﻦ ﺇﻴﻗﺎﻑ ﺘﺷﻐﻝ ﺃﻘﺭﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﺍﻠﺘﻟﻓﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻠﻣﻛﻭﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺨﺭﻯ ﻘﺑﻝ ﺘﻭﺼﻳﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻜﺎﺒﻼﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻔﺻﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ ﻴﺭﺠﻰ ﺍﻠﺭﺠﻭﻉ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺩﻠﻝ ﺍﻠﻣﺳﺘﺨﺩﻡ ﻠﻟﻣﻛﻭﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎ ﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻠﺘﻲ ﺘﻗﻭﻢ ﺒﺗﻭﺼﻳﻟﻬﺎ ﻠﻟﺤﺼﻭﻝ ﻋﻟﻰ ﻤﺯﻴٍﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻠﻣﻌﻟﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺤﻭﻝ ﺘﻟﻙ ﺍﻠﻣﻛﻭﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﺧﺎﺼﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ .A‬ﺍﻠﺗﻭﺼﻳﻝ ﺒﺠﻬﺯ ﺘﺈﻔﺎﺯ )ﻠﻟﻔﻴﺩﻴﻭ(‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺒﺎﺴﺗﺧﺩﺍﻢ ﻜﺎﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻠﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ‪،‬ﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻭﺼﻳﻝ ﻄﺭ ﻔﻲ ﺍﻠﺗﻭﺼﻳﻝ ‪) VIDEO‬ﺍﻷﺼﻔﺭ(‪) AUDIO OUT/‬ﺍﻷﺒﻳﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺤﻤﺭ( ﺒﺎﻠﺠﺯ ﺀ ﺍﻠﺧﻟﻔﻲ ﻤﻦ ﻤﺷﻐﻝ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺃﻘﺭﺍﺹ ‪) 5.1‬ﺍﻠﻗﻧﺎﺓ ‪ 5.1CH‬ﻭ ﺍﻷﺒﻳﺾ( ﺍﻠﺧﺎﺹ ﺃﻘﺭﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺒﻃﺭﻔﻲ ﺘﻭﺼﻳﻝ ‪) VIDEO‬ﺍﻷﺼﻔﺭ(‪) AUDIO IN/‬ﺍﻷﺒﻳﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺤﻤﺭ( ﺒﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻠﺗﻟﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻘﻢ ﺒﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻤﺷﻐﻝ ﺃﻘﺭﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻭ ﺍﻠﺘﻟﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻟﻰ ﻤﺤﺩﺩ ﺍﻠﺩﺧﻝ ﺒﻭﺤﺩﺓ ﺍﻠﺗﺤﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺍﻠﺧﺎﺼﺔ ﺒﺎﻠﺗﻟﻳﻔﺯﻴﻭﻦ ﺤﺗﻰ ﺘﻇﻬﺭ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻠﻔﻴﺩﻴﻭ ﺍﻠﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻤﻥ ﻤﺷﻐﻝ ‪ DVD‬ﻋﻟﻰ ﺸﺎﺸﺔ ﺍﻠﺗﻟﻳﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‬
‫ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ‬
‫ ﻘﺩ ﻴﺣﺩﺚ ﺘﺷﻭﻴﺶ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻦ ﻜﺎﺒﻝ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺕ ﺸﺩﻴﺩ ﺍﻠﻗﺭﺏ ﻤﻥ ﻜﺎﺒﻝ ﺍﻠﺘﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻠﻛﻬﺭﺒﻲ‪.‬‬‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﻠﺗﻮﺼﻳﻝ ﺒﻣﺿﺧﻡ ﺼﻭﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻔﻳُﺭ ﺠﻰ ﺇﻠﺭ ﺠﻭﻉ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺘﻭﺼﻳﻝ ﻤﺿﺧﻢ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ﻴﺧﺗﺎﻑ ﻋﺫﺩ ﺃﻄﺭﺍﻒ ﺍﻠﺘﻭﺼﻳﻝ ﻭﺼﻳﻝ ﻭﻤﻭﻀﻌﻬﺎ ﺤﺳﺏ ﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻠﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻴﹸﺭﺠﻰ ﺍﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺩﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻠﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻠﺧﺎﺹ ﺒﺎﻠﺗﻟﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫ ﻔﻲ ﺤﺎﻠﺔ ﻮﺠﻮﺩ ﻄﺭﻒ ﺘﻭﺼﻳﻝ ﺩﺨﻝ ﺼﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﺒﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻠﺘﻟﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻘﻢ ﺒﺗﻭﺼﻳﻟﻪ ﺒﻁﺭﻒ ﺘﻭﺼﻳﻝ ]‪] [AUDIO OUT‬ﺍﻷﻴﺳﺭ[ )ﺍﻷﺒﻳﺽ( ﺍﻠﻣﻮﺠﻭﺩ ﺒﻤﺷﻐﻝ‬‫‬
‫ﺃﻘﺭﺍﺹ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ ﻔﻲ ﺤﺎﻠﺔ ﺍﻠﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻟﻰﺯﺭ ‪ VIDEO SEL.‬ﻋﻧﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﻛﻭﻦ ﻤﺷﻐﻝ ‪ DVD‬ﻔﻲ ﻮﻀﻊ ﺍﻠﺗﻭﻘﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻔﻲ ﺤﺎﻠﺔ ﻋﺩﻢ ﺇﺩﺨﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻘﺭﺹ ‪ ،‬ﻴﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻠﻭﻀﻊ ﺨﺭﺝ‬‫‬
‫ﺍﻠﻔﻳﺩﻴﻭ ﺒﺎﻠﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝﺍﻠﺘﺎﻠﻱ ‪.(P-SCAN o I-SCAN) :‬‬
‫‪ .B‬ﺍﻠﺗﻭﺼﻳﻝ ﺒﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺘﻟﻓﺎﺯ )ﺘﺩﺍﺧﻝ‪/‬ﻤﺘﻗﺩﻢ(‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺒﺎﺴﺘﺧﺩﺍﻢ ﻜﺎﺒﻼﺕ ﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻠﻣﻛﻭﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻘﻢ ﺒﺗﻭﺼﻳﻝ ﻃﺭﻒ ﺘﻭﺼﻳﻝ ‪ COMPONENT VIDEO OUT‬ﺍﻠﻣﻭﺠﻭﺩ ﺒﺎﻠﺠﺯ ﺀ ﺍﻠﺨﻟﻓﻲ ﻠﻣﺷﻐﻞ ﺃﻘﺭﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺒﻃﺭﻑ‬
‫‬
‫ﺘﻮﺼﻳﻝ ‪ COMPONENT IN‬ﺒﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻠﺘﻟﻓﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺒﺎﺴﺗﺧﺩﺍﻢ ﻜﺎﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺖ ‪ ،‬ﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻭﺼﻳﻝ ﻄﺭ ﻔﻲ ﺍﻠﺗﻭﺼﻳﻝ ‪) AUDIO OUT‬ﺍﻷﺒﻳﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺤﻤﺭ( ﺒﺎﻠﺠﺯ ﺀ ﺍﻠﺧﻟﻔﻲ ﻤﻦ ﻤﺷﻐﻝ ﺃﻭﺃﻘﺭﺍﺹ ‪) 5.1‬ﺍﻠﻗﻧﺎﺓ ‪5.1CH‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺍﻷﺒﻳﺾ( ﺍﻠﺧﺎﺹ ﺃﻘﺭﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺒﻃﺭﻔﻲ ﺘﻭﺼﻳﻝ ‪) AUDIO IN‬ﺍﻷﺒﻳﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺤﻤﺭ( ﺒﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻠﺗﻟﻔﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻘﻢ ﺒﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻤﺷﻐﻝ ﺃﻘﺭﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻭ ﺍﻠﺘﻟﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻀﺑﻄ ﺨﺭﺝ ﺍﻠﻔﻴﺩﻳﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ P-SCAN/I-SCAN‬ﻔﻲ ﻘﺎﺌﻣﺔ ‪ Display Setup‬ﻴﻣﻛﻥﺍﺴﺘﺧﺪﺍﻢﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ VIDEO SEL.‬ﻔﻲ ﺘﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺨﺭﺝ ﺍﻠﻔﻳﺩﻴﻭ‪.‬‬
‫‬
‫ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ‬
‫‬
‫ ﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ”ﺍﻻﺴﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻠﻩﺘﻗﺩﻢ“ ‪.‬‬‫ﻴﺘﻣﻳﺯ ﺍﻻﺴﺗﻌﺭﺍﺾ ﺍﻠﻤﺗﻗﺩﻢ ﺒﺄﻨﻪ ﻴﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺨﻄﻭﻄ ﺍﺴﺘﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﻀﻌﻒ ﺨﻃﻭﻃ ﺍﻻﺴﺗﻌﺭﺍﺾﺍﻠﺨﺎﺼﺔ ﺒﻄﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﺨﺭﺝ ﺍﻠﺗﺩﺍﺨﻝ‪ .‬ﻴﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻦ ﺘﻤﻧﺤﻙ ﻄﺭﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫ﺍﻻﺴﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻠﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ ﺠﻭﺩﺓ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭﻀﺢ ﻭﺃﻔﺿﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .C‬ﺍﻠﺗﻭﺼﻳﻝ ﺒﺎﻠﺗﻠﻳﻔﺯﻴﻭﻥ ﺒﺎﺴﺗﺨﺩﺍﻡ ﻤﻗﺒﺱ ‪(DVD-D530K/DVD-D530) HDMI/DVI‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺒﺎﺴﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻜﺎﺒﻝ ‪ ، HDMI-HDMI/HDMI-DVI‬ﻘﻡ ﺒﺗﻭﺼﻳﻝ ﻃﺭﻑ ﺘﻭﺼﻳﻝ ‪ HDMI OUT‬ﺍﻠﻣﻭﺠﻭﺩ ﺒﺎﻠﺠﺯ ﺀ ﺍﻠﺧﻟﻔﻲ ﻠﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﺃﻘﺭﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺒﻄﺭﻒ‬
‫‬
‫ﺘﻮﺼﻳﻝ ‪ HDMI/DVI IN‬ﺒﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻠﺘﻟﻓﺎﺯﻴﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺒﺎﺴﺗﺧﺩﺍﻢ ﻜﺎﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺖ ‪ ،‬ﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻭﺼﻳﻝ ﻄﺭ ﻔﻲ ﺍﻠﺗﻭﺼﻳﻝ ‪) AUDIO OUT‬ﺍﻷﺒﻳﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺤﻤﺭ( ﺒﺎﻠﺠﺯ ﺀ ﺍﻠﺧﻟﻔﻲ ﻤﻦ ﻤﺷﻐﻝ ﺃﻭﺃﻘﺭﺍﺹ ‪) 5.1‬ﺍﻠﻗﻧﺎﺓ ‪5.1CH‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺍﻷﺒﻳﺾ( ﺍﻠﺧﺎﺹ ﺃﻘﺭﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺒﻃﺭﻔﻲ ﺘﻭﺼﻳﻝ ‪) AUDIO IN‬ﺍﻷﺒﻳﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺤﻤﺭ( ﺒﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻠﺗﻟﻔﺎﺯﻴﻭﻦ‪ .‬ﻘﻢ ﺒﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻤﺷﻐﻝ ﺃﻘﺭﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻭ ﺍﻠﺘﻟﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻠﺩﺨﻝ ﺒﻭﺤﺩﺓ ﺍﻠﺗﻛﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺍﻠﺧﺎﺼﺔ ﺒﺎﻠﺘﻠﻴﻔﺯﻴﻭﻦ ﺤﺗﻰ ﺘﻅﻬﺭ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ‪ HDMI/DVI‬ﺍﻠﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻤﻦ ﻤﺷﻐﻝ ‪ DVD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺸﺎﺸﺔ ﺍﻠﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻴﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻤﻭﺍﺼﻔﺎﺕ ‪(DVD-D530K/DVD-D530) HDMI VIDEO‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻠﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ HDMI SEL.‬ﻴﺗﻢ ﺘﺤﺩﻳﺩ ‪ 1080i ، 720p ، 576p ، 480p‬ﻭ ‪ 1080p‬ﺒﺎﻠﺗﺭﺘﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻠﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ HDMI SEL.‬ﻷﻮﻝ ﻤﺭﺓ ﺈﻠﻰ ﻆﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻠﺩﻘﺔ ﺍﻠﺤﺎﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﻤﻦ ﺨﻼﻝ ﺍﻠﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻠﻟﻣﺭﺓ ﺍﻠﺛﺎﻨﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻴﻣﻛﻦ ﺘﻐﻴﻳﺭ ﺩﻘﺔ ﺨﺭﺝ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫ ﻘﺩ ﻻ ﺘﻌﻣﻝ ﺩﻗﺎﺕ ﺨﺭﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻤُﻌﻳﻨﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻮﺫﻠﻚ ﺤﺳﺏ ﺍﻠﺗﻠﻳﻔﺯﻴﻭﻦ ﺍﻠﻤﺘﻭﻔﺭ ﻠﺩﻴﻚ‪.‬‬‫ ﻴُﺭﺠﻰ ﺍﻠﺭﺠﻭﻉ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺩﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻠﻤﺳﺗﺧﺩﻢ ﺍﻠﺧﺎﺹ ﺒﺎﻠﺘﻠﻳﻔﺰﻴﻭﻦ‪.‬‬‫ ﻔﻲ ﺤﺎﻠﺔ ﺘﻭﺼﻳﻝ ﻜﺎﺒﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ‪ HDMI-DVI‬ﺒﺎﻠﺗﻠﻴﻭﻦ ‪ ،‬ﻴﺗﻢ ﻀﺒﻄ ﺨﺭﺝ ﻤﺷﻐﻝ ‪ DVD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ HDMI/DVI‬ﻔﻲ ﻏﺿﻭﻦ ‪ ١٠‬ﺜﻭﺎﻥ‪.‬‬‫ ﻔﻲ ﺤﺎﻠﺔ ﻀﺑﻂ ﺩﻘﺔ ﺨﺭﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1080i ، 720p‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ، 1080p‬ﻴﻭﻔﺭ ﺧﺭﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺠﻭﺩﺓ ﺃﻔﺿﻝ ﻠﻟﺼﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ ﻔﻲ ﺤﺎﻠﺔ ﺘﻭﺼﻳﻝ ﻜﺎﺒﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺒﻳﻥ ﺘﻟﻓﺎﺯ ﺴﺎﻤﺳﻭﻨﺞ‪ ،‬ﺘﺳﺗﻃﻳﻊ ﺬﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻤﺷﻐﻝ ‪ DVD‬ﺒﺳﻬﻭﻠﺔ ﺒﺎﺴﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭ ﺤﺩﺓ ﺍﻠﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻠﺧﺎﺼﺔ ﺒﺎﻠﺗﻟﻓﺎﺯ‬‫)ﻴﺗﻭﺍﻔﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻔﻗﻁ ﻤﻊ ﺘﻟﻓﺎﺯ ﺴﺎﻤﺳﻭﻨﺞ ﺍﻠﺩﻱ ﻴﺩﻋﻡ ﻭﻈﻳﻓﺔ )‪.Anynet+(HDMI-CEC‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻔﻬﺫﺍ ﻴﻌﻧﻲ ﻥﺃ ﺍﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻴﺩﻋﻡ ﻭﻈﻳﻓﺔ‪.(Anynet+‬‬
‫)ﻔﻲ ﺤﺎﻠﺔ ﻭﺠﻭﺩ ﺸﻌﺎﺭ‬
‫ ﻴﺭﺠﻰ ﺍﻠﺗﺣﻗﻕ ﻤﻥ ﻭﺠﻭﺩﺸﻌﺎﺭ‬‫▪ ‪) HDMI‬ﻮﺍﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻠﻭﺴﺎﺌﻃ ﺍﻠﻣﺘﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻠﻭﻀﻭﺡ( )‪(DVD-D530K/DVD-D530‬‬
‫‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺍﺠﻬﺔ ﺘﺳﻣﺢ ﺒﺎﻠﻧﻗﻝ ﺍﻠﺭﻘﻤﻲ ﻠﺒﻳﺎﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﻔﻳﺩﻴﻭ ﻭ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺕ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﺧﺩﺍﻢ ﻤﻮﺼﻝ ﻭﺍﺤﺩ ﻔﻘﻄ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻤﻦ ﺨﻼﻝ ﺍﺴﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ HDMI‬ﻴﻧﻗﻝ ﻤﺷﻐﻝ ‪ DVD‬ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺽﻮﺕ ﻮﻔﻴﺩﻴﻭ ﺭﻘﻣﻳﺔ ﻭﻴﻌﺭﺽ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺗﻠﻳﻔﺯﻴﻭﻦ ﺍﻠﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺒﻤﻗﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻝ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫▪ ﻮﺼﻑ ﻭﺼﻠﺔ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﻤﻭﺼﻝ ‪ - HDMI‬ﻜﻼﻫﻣﺎ ﻋﺑﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺒﻳﺎﻨﺎﺕ ﺼﻭﺕ ﺭﻘﻣﻳﺔ ﻭﺒﻳﺎﻨﺎﺕ ﻔﻴﺩﻴﻭﻏﻧﺭ ﻤﺿﻐﻭﻄﺔ )‪ LPCM‬ﺃﻭ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﺎﺕ ﺘﺩﻔﻕ ﻭﺤﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻠﺑﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺭﻘﻣﻳﺔ ﻨﻗﻳﺔ ﻔﻗﻃ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻴﻭﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺭﻏﻡ ﻤﻦ ﺃﻦ ﺍﻠﻣﺸﻐﻝ ﻴﺳﺗﺧﺩﻢ ﻜﺎﺒﻝ ‪ ، HDMI‬ﻴُﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻠﻣﺷﻐﻞ‪.‬‬‫ ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻦ ﺍﻠﺗﻠﻳﻔﺯﻴﻭﻦ ﻻ ﻴﺩﻋﻢ ‪) HDCP‬ﺤﻣﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻠﻣﺤﺘﻭﻯ ﺍﻠﺭﻘﻣﻲ ﻋﺎﻠﻲ ﺍﻠﻨﻄﺎﻖ( ‪ ،‬ﻴﻅﻬﺭ ﺗﺷﻮﻴﺶ ﺃﺒﻳﺾ ﻠﻟﻮﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺸﺎﺸﺔ‪.‬‬‫▪ ﻟﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﺳﺘﺧﺩﻢ ﺸﺭﻜﺔ ‪ Samsung‬ﺘﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺍﻠﺭ ﻏﻡ ﻤﻦ ﺫﻠﻚ‪ ،‬ﻔﻌﻧﺩ ﺘﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﺤﺩ ﺃﻘﺭﺍﺹ ‪ ، DVD‬ﻔﺈﻦ ﺍﻠﺒﻴﺎﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﺗﻲ ﻴﺗﻡ ﺘﺗﻄﻠﺏ ﺃﺠﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻠﺗﻠﻴﻔﺯﻴﻭﻦ ﺍﻠﺘﻧﺎﻅﺭﻴﺔ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﻔﻴﺩﻴﻭ‪/‬ﺼﻮﺕ ﺘﻧﺎﻅﺭﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻮﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻨﻗﺎﻬﺎ ﺇﻠﻶ ﺍﻠﺗﻠﻳﻔﺯﻴﻭﻦ ﺘﻛﻭﻦ ﺒﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺭﻘﻣﻳﺔ ‪ .‬ﻮﻤﻦ ﺜﻡ ﻴﺗﻌﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻤﺤﻭﻝ ﺭﻘﻣﻲ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺘﻧﺎﻅﺭﻱ )ﻔﻲ ﻤﺷﻐﻝ ‪ (DVD‬ﺃﻭ ﻤﺤﻭﻝ ﺘﻧﺎﻅﺭﻱ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺭﻘﻣﻲ‬
‫)ﻔﻲ ﺍﻠﺗﻠﻳﻔﺯﻴﻮﻦ(‪ .‬ﺃﺜﻧﺎ ﺀ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻠﺗﺤﻮﻴﻝ ﺘﺗﺭﺪﻯ ﺠﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺒﺳﺘﺏ ﺍﻠﺗﺷﻮﻴﺶ ﻮﻔﻘﺩﺍﻦ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺩ ﺘﻗﻨﻳﺔ ‪ DVI‬ﻫﻲ ﺍﻷﻔﺿﻝ ﺤﻳﺚ ﺇﻨﻬﺎ ﻻ ﺘﺗﻄﻟﺏ‬
‫ﺘﺤﻮﻳﻝ ﺭﻘﻤﻲ‪/‬ﺘﻨﺎﻆﺭﻱ ﻭﺘﻨﻗﻝ ﺇﺸﺎﺓ ﺭﻘﻣﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻠﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺗﻠﻳﻔﺰﻴﻭﻦ‪.‬‬
‫▪ ﻤﺎ ﺍﻠﻣﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﺒ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ‪) HDCP‬ﺤﻣﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻠﻣﺤﺗﻮﻯ ﺍﻠﺭﻘﻣﻲ ﻋﺎﻠﻲ ﺍﻠﻨﻄﺎﻖ( ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻨﻄﺎﻢ ﻴﺳﺗﺧﺩﻢ ﻠﺤﻣﺎﻴﺔ ﻤﺤﺗﻮﻴﺎﺕ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻠﺗﻲ ﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺭ ﺍﺠﻬﺎ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪ DVI‬ﺒﺤﻳﺙ‬
‫ﻻ ﻴﺗﻢ ﻨﺳﺧﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻮﻴﻭﻔﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻠﻧﻅﺎﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻ ﺭﻘﻤﻳﹰﺎ ﺁﻤﻧًﺎ ﺒﻴﻦ ﻤﺼﺭ ﻔﻴﺩﻴﻭ)ﺍﻠﻜﻣﺒﻴﻮﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﻤﺎ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺫﻠﻚ( ﻮﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻠﻌﺭﺾ )ﺍﻠﺗﻠﻳﻔﺯﻴﻭﻦ ﻮﺁﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻠﻌﺭﺽ ﻮﻤﺎ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺫﻠﻚ(‪ .‬ﻮﻴﺘﻡ ﺘﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻠﻣﺤﺗﻮﻯ ﻔﻲ ﺍﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻠﻣﺼﺭ ﻠﻤﻨﻊ ﺇﻨﺷﺎﺀ ﻨﺳﺦ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺭﺨﺼﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .D‬ﺍﻠﺗﻭﺼﻳﻝ ﺒﻨﻅﻡ ﺼﻭﺕ )ﻤﺾﺧﻡ ﺼﻮﺕ ﺜﻨﺎﺌﻲ ﺍﻠﻓﺘﻭﺍﺕ‪/‬ﻤﺿﺧﻢ ﺍﻠﻓﺘﻭﺍﺕ ‪ Dolby Digital‬ﺃﻮ ‪(MPEG2‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺒﺎﺴﺗﺧﺩﺍﻢ ﻜﺎﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺖ ‪ ،‬ﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻭﺼﻳﻝ ﻄﺭ ﻔﻲ ﺍﻠﺗﻭﺼﻳﻝ ‪) AUDIO OUT‬ﺍﻷﺒﻳﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺤﻤﺭ( ﺒﺎﻠﺠﺯﺀ ﺍﻠﺧﻟﻔﻲ ﻤﻦ ﻤﺷﻐﻝ ﺃﻭﺃﻘﺭﺍﺹ ‪) 5.1‬ﺍﻠﻗﻧﺎﺓ ‪5.1CH‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺍﻷﺒﻳﺾ( ﺍﻠﺧﺎﺹ ﺃﻘﺭﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺒﻃﺭﻔﻲ ﺘﻭﺼﻳﻝ ‪) AUDIO IN‬ﺍﻷﺒﻳﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺤﻤﺭ( ﺒﻣﺿﺧﻢ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺕ‪ .‬ﻘﻢ ﺒﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻤﺷﻐﻝ ﺃﻘﺭﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻭ ﺍﻠﺘﻟﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﻨﺕ ﺘﺳﺗﺧﺩﻢ ﻜﺎﺒﻸﺫﺍ ﻤﺤﻮﺭﻴﻦ ‪ ،‬ﻔﻗﻡ ﺒﺗﻮﺼﻴﻝ ﻄﺭﻒ ﺘﻮﺼﻴﻝ )‪ DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (COAXIAL‬ﺍﻠﻤﻭﺠﻮﺩ ﺒﺎﻠﺠﺯﺀ ﺍﻠﺧﺎﻔﻲ‬
‫‬
‫ﻠﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﺃﻘﺭﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺒﻄﺭﻒ ﺘﻮﺼﻴﻝ )‪ DIGITAL AUDIO IN (COAXIAL‬ﻠﻤﻀﺧﻢ ﺍﻠﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺒﺎﺴﺘﺧﺩﺍﻢ ﻜﺎﺒﻝ )ﻜﺎﺒﻼﺕ( ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻠﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ‪ ،‬ﻘﻢ ﺒﺗﻭﺼﻳﻝ ﺃﻃﺭﺍﻒ ﺍﻠﺘﻭﺼﻳﻝ ‪ VIDEO‬ﺃﻭ ‪ COMPONENT OUT‬ﺒﺎﻠﺠﺯ ﺀ ﺍﻠﺨﻟﻓﻲ ﻤﻦ ﻠﻣﺷﻐﻞ ﺃﻘﺭﺍﺹ‬
‫‬
‫‪ DVD‬ﺒﻃﺭﻑ ﺘﻮﺼﻳﻝ ‪ VIDEO‬ﺃﻭ ‪ COMPONENT IN‬ﺒﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻠﺘﻟﻓﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻘﻢ ﺒﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻤﺷﻐﻝ ﺃﻘﺭﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻭ ﺍﻠﺘﻟﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﻤﻀﺧﻡ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻟﻰ ﺯﺭﺘﺤﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻠﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻠﺩﺧﺎﺹ ﺒﻣﺿﺧﻢ ﺍﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﻠﺗﺤﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻠﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻠﺧﺎﺭﺠﻲ ﻠﺳﻣﺎ ﻉ ﺍﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﻤﻥ ﻤﺷﻐﻝ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﺍﻠﻭﻈﺎﺌﻑ ﺍﻷﺴﺎﺴﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺘﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻠﻘﺮﺺ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻝ ﺍﻠﺗﺷﻐﻴﻝ‬
‫ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻝ ﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻠﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭ ﺍﺿﺑﻃﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺪﺧﻝ ﺍﻠﻔﻴﺪﻴﻭ ﺍﻠﺼﺣﻴﺢ ﺒﺎﻠﺿﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ‪ TV/VIDEO‬ﺑﻭ ﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻠﺘﺣﻛﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺒُﻌﺪ ﺍﻠﺧﺎﺼﺔ ﺒﺎﻠﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻠﺔ ﺗﻭ ﺼﻴﻝ ﻨﻆﺎﻢ ﺽﻮﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺷﻐﻴﻝ ﻧﻅﺎﻢ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻀﺒﻂﻪ ﻋﻠﻰﺪﺧﻝ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺕ ﺍﻠﺼﺣﻴﺢ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺘﻭ ﺼﻴﻝ ﺍﻠﻣﺷﻐﻝ‪ ،‬ﺘﻅﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻠﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭ ﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺘﻲ ﺘﺿﻐﻄ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ‪ POWER‬ﺍﻠﺣﺎﺹ ﺒﻤﺷﻐﻝ ﺃﻗﺮ ﺍﺹ ‪ .DVD‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺪﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺮ ﻋﻠﻰﺯﺮ‬
‫†‪ ،π/‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺰﺮ ‪) .ENTER‬ﺘﻅﻬﺮ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻠﺷﺎ ﺷﺔ ﻔﻘﻃ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺎﻠﻠﻐﺎﺕ ‪،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻄ ﺘﻭﺼﻴﻝ ﺍﻠﻤﺷﻐﻝﻠﻠﻣﺮ ﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻠﻰ‪ (.‬ﺇﺬﺍ ﻠﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻀﺑﻄ ﺷﺎﺸﺔ ﺑﺪﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻠﺘﺷﻐﻴﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺘﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺪﺍﺕ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺘﻘﻭ ﻢ ﺑﺎﻠﺘﺷﻐﻴﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻠﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻀﺑﻄ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻠﺴﺑﺐ‪ ،‬ﺘﺄﻜﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺮ ﺍﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻠﻤﺮ ﺍﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺧﺪ ﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﻣﺠﺭﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺮﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﻘﺎﺌﻤﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻴﻤﻛﻨﻚﺘﻐﻳﻳﺮﻫﺎﺒﺎﻠﺿﻐﻄﻋﻠﻰﺍﻠﺰﺮ ||® ﺒﺎﻠﻠﻭ ﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻠﻠﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻠﻤﺪﺓ ﺘﺯﻴﺪ ﻋﻦ ﻩ ﺛﻭﺍﻦﻤﻊﻮ ﺟﻭﺪ ﺍﻠﻘﺮﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻠﻭﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ‪ ،‬ﻴﻅﻬﺮﺇﻂﺎﺮ ‪SELECT MENU‬‬
‫‪ LANGUAGE‬ﻤﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻴﻤﻜﻨﻙ ﺇﻋﺎﺪﺓ ﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻠﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻠﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺇﻠﻴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-D360K‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺣﺩﺍﻡ ﻮﻅﻳﻔﺘﻲ ﺍﻠﺒﺤﺖ ﻮﺍﻠﺛﺨﻂﻲ‬
‫ﻷﺒﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ‬
‫ﻤﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﺮﻴﻭ ﺜﻧﺎﺌﻲ ﺍﻠﻘﻧﻮﺍﺕ‪,‬‬
‫ﻤﺿﺨﻢ ﺻﻭﺖ ﺪﻭﻠﺑﻲ ﺮﻗﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻜﺎﺒﻞ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺖ‬
‫ﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺫﻭ ﻣﺤﻭﺮﻴﻥ‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺮ‬
‫ﻷﺒﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀﺍﻠﺗﺸﻐﻳﻞﻋﻛﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺙ ﺒﺳﺭ ﻋﺓ ﺧﻼ ﻞ ﻔﺼﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺪ ﺓ ﻤﺳﺠﻟﺔ ﻭ ﺍ ﺴﺘﺧﺮ ﺍ ﻡ ﻮ ﻈﻳﻔﺔ ﺍ ﻟﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﻟﻼ ﺒﺘﻘﺎ ﻞ ﺇ ﻟﻰ ﺍ ﻟﺘﺣﺪ ﻴﺪ ﺍﻠﺘﺎ ﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺍ ﻟﺒﺣﺙ ﺠﻼﻝﺃﻮ ﻤﺎﺪﺓ ﻣﺴﺟﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺮﻖ‬
‫ﻷﺒﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺍ ﻟﺒﺣﺙ ﺠﻼﻝﺃﻮ ﻤﺎﺪﺓ ﻣﺴﺟﻟﺔ ‪ K) SEARCH‬ﺃﻮ ‪ (k‬ﺒﻮﺤﺮﺓﺍﻠﺘﺤﻜﻡﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻓﻴﺪﻴﻭ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫ﻜﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻜﺎﺒﻞ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺖ‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺮ ﺍﻷﺯﺮﻖ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺭ‬
‫ﻷﺒﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ‬
‫‪DVD-D530K‬‬
‫‪DVD-D530‬‬
‫ﻷﺒﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ‬
‫ﻤﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﺮﻴﻭ ﺜﻧﺎﺌﻲ ﺍﻠﻘﻧﻮﺍﺕ‪,‬‬
‫ﻤﺿﺨﻢ ﺻﻭﺖ ﺪﻭﻠﺑﻲ ﺮﻗﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻜﺎﺒﻞ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺖ‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺮ‬
‫ﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺫﻭ ﻣﺤﻭﺮﻴﻥ‬
‫ﺘﺧﻁﻲﺍﻟﻮﺍﺪﺍﻟﺴﺠﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀﺪ ﺘﺛﻔﻳﻞ‪،‬ﺍﻀﻐﻁﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺯﺮ ‪ K|) SKIP‬ﺃﻮ ‪(|k‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺮﻖ‬
‫ﻷﺒﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﻜﺎﺒﻝ‬
‫‪4X, 8X‬‬
‫‪VCD‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﺘﻗﻞ ﺈﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﺼﻞ‪.‬ﺘﺆﺪﻲ ﻀﻐﻂﺔ ﺃﺧﺮ ﻯﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺇﻠﻰﺍﻨﺘﻘﺎ ﻠﻪﺇﻟﻰ ﺒﺪﺍﻴﺔ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﺎ ﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪2X, 4X, 8X, 16X, 32X‬‬
‫‪CD‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻋﻧﺪ ﺘﺸﻐﻳﻝ ﻗﺭ ﺼﻦ ‪ ، DVD‬ﺈﺬﺍﻘﻣﺖ ﻧﺎ ﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﺎﻰ ﻟﺯﺮ ‪ (K|) SKIP‬ﻔﺴﻴﻨﺘﻘﻞﺇﻟﻰﺍﻠﻔﺼﻞﺇﻟﻰﺍﻠﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﺘﺎ ﻟﻲ‪.‬ﻓﻲ ﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂﻋﺎﻰ ﻟﺯﺮ‪(|k) SKIP‬‬
‫ﻷﺒﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻜﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ HDMI-DVI‬ﻜﺎﺒﻝ‬
‫‪2X, 4X, 8X, 16X, 32X‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‬
‫ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ‬
‫ ﻗﺪ ﺜﺧﻳﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺳﺮﻋﺔﺍﻜﺑﻳﺑﺔ ﻔﻲﻫﺬﻩﺍﻟﻮ ﻅﻴﻔﺔﻋﻦ ﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻠﺘﺸﻐﻳﻞ ﺍﻠﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪-‬ﻻﻴﺼﺪﺮﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺖﺃﺛﻧﺎﺀﻮﻀﻊﺍﻟﺑﺣﺚ‪).‬ﺑﺎﺴﺘﺛﻧﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﻟﻐﻌﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺮ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻓﻴﺪﻴﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺮﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫ﻷﺒﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻜﺎﺒﻞ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ‬
‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺘﺷﻐﻴﻝ ﻘﺭﺹ ‪ VCD‬ﻂ‪،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻀﻐﻃﺕ ﻋﺎﻰ ﻟﺯﺮ ‪، (K|) SKIP‬ﻔﺴﻳﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻠﺎﺪﺓ ﺍﻠﺴﺟﻟﺔ ﺍﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬ﻘﻲﺣﺎﻟﺔﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺯﺮ ‪(|k) SKIP‬‬‫‪،‬ﻴﻧﺘﻘﻞﺇﻟﻰﺑﺪﺇﻳﺔ ﺍﻠﺎﺪﺓﺍﻠﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬ﺘﻮﺪﻱ ﻀﻐﻃﺔﺃﺧﺭﻯﻋﻠﻴﻪﺇﻟﻰﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎ ﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻣﺎﺪ ﺓ ﻤﺴﺟﻟﺔ ﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺇﺬﺍﺤﺘﺎﻮﺯﺕ ﻣﺩﺓﺍﻠﺎﺪﺓﺍﻟﺎﺪﻩﺍﺪﻘﻴﻘﺔﻋﻨﺪ ﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞﻘﺭﺹ ‪ VCD‬ﻮﻘﻤﺕ ﻧﺎﻟﻀﻐﻃﻋﻟﻰﺍﻟﺰﺭ )|‪ ، (K‬ﻔﺴﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞﺈﻠﻰﺍﻷﻤﺎﻡ‪.‬ﻋﻘﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﺩﻘﺎﺋﻕ‪ .‬ﺇﺬﺍﺿﻐﻃﺕﻋﻟﻰﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪(|k‬‬‫ﻔﺳﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻠﺧﻠﻒ‪.‬ﻋﻘﺩﺍﺭﻩﺩﻘﺎﺋﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺭ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺩﺍﻡ ﻮﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺪ ﺘﺛﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺭﺺ ‪DVD/VCD/MPEG4‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺜﻧﺎﺀ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ TOOLS‬ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺣﻜﻢ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂﻋﻟﻰﺯﺮ†‪ π/‬ﻟﺘﺣﺪ ﻳﺪﺍﻠﻌﻨﺼﺭﺍﻟﻁﻟﻮﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻀﻐﻃ ﻋﻠﺯﺭ®‪ √/‬ﻹﺣﺮﺇﻹﻋﺪ‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻹﺨﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻠﺸﺎﺸﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض )‪ (Display‬ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺪول أدﻧﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻠﻠﻮﺼﻮﻝ ﺇﻠﻰﺍﻠﻌﻧﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻠﻣﻄﻠﻮﺐ ﻔﻲ ﺤﺎﻠﺔ ﻮﺟﻭﺪ ﺃﻜﺛﺭ ﻤﻥ ﻋﻨﻭﺍﻦ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻘﺭﺹ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺴﺑﻴﻝ ﺍﻠﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻔﻲﺤﺎﻠﺔ ﻮﺤﻮﺩ ﺃﻜﺗﺮﻣﻥ ﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺯﺺ‬
‫‪ ،DVD‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻠﺘﻌﺭﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻝ ﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻇﻢ ﺃﻘﺭﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻔﻲ ﻔﺼﻮﻝ ﺤﺗﻰ ﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻠﻌﺛﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻤﺤﺩﺩ )ﺗﺜﺑﻪ ﺍﻠﻣﻮﺍﺪ ﺍﻠﻣﺴﺟﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺻﻮﺖ ﻤﻀﻐﻮﻄ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺘﺎﺧﺔ ﺘﺸﻐﻴﻝ ﺍﻠﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻠﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻠﻣﻄﻠﻮﺐ‪ .‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺇﺪﺨﺎﻝ ﻮﻗﺕ ﺍﻠﺑﺩﺀ ﻜﻤﺮﺠﻊ‪ .‬ﻻﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻠﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻠﻺﺸﺎﺮﺓ ﺇﻠﻰ ﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻠﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻠﺻﻮﺗﻳﺔ ﺍﻠﻣﺳﺠﻠﺔ ﻠﻠﻔﻳﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻠﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺴﺟﻠﺔ ﻔﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪.English 5.1CH‬‬
‫ﻋﻳﻣﻜﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻴﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻗﺭﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺘﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺼﻮﺗﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺟﻠﺔ ﻣﺤﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻠﻺﺸﺎﺮﺓ ﺇﻠﻰ ﻠﻐﺎﺖ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺠﻤﺔ ﺍﻠﻣﺼﺎﺤﺑﺔ ﺍﻠﻣﺗﻮ ﻔﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻘﺭﺺ ‪.‬ﺴﺗﺗﻣﻛﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺨﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻠﻐﺎﺖ ﺍﻠﺘﺭﺟﻣﺔ ﺍﺍﻠﻣﺻﺎﺤﺑﺔ ﺃﻮ ﺇﻴﻗﺎﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻠﺸﺎﺸﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻓﺿﻝ ﺫﻠﻚ‪.‬ﻳﻣﻜﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺗﻮﻱ ﻘﺭﺺ ‪ DVD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻠﻰ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺗﺭﺣﻣﺔ ﻣﺼﺎ ﺤﺑﺔ ﻤﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪EZ‬‬
‫ﺘﺴﺘﺨﺩﻡﺍﻠﻮﻈﻴﻔﺔ‪﴿EZ View‬ﻋﺭﺽ‪﴾EZ‬ﻟﻐﻳﻳﺭﻨﺴﺑﺔﺍﻠﻌﺭ ﺾﺇﻠﻰﺍﻻﺭﻉﺑﺎﻠﻗﺭﺺ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ‬
‫ ﻻ ﺘﺳﻤﺢ ﻮﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪ AB REPEAT‬ﻠﻙ ﺒﺿﺒﻄ ﺍﻠﻧﻗﻃﺔ )‪ (B‬ﺤﺘﻰ ﺍﻨﻗﺿﺎﺀ ﻩ ﺜﻮﺍٍﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻘﻝ ﻤﻦ ﺍﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻝ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺼﺒﻄ ﺍﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ )‪.(A‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺤﺳﺏ ﺍﻠﻘﺭﺿ‪ ،‬ﺭﺒﻤﺎ ﻻ ﺘﻌﻤﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪.Repeat‬‬
‫ﺍﻠﺘﺷﻐﻴﻝ ﺍﻠﺑﻃﻲﺀ‬
‫ﻰ ﻠﻠﻤﺷﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻠﻤﺤﺘﻭﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻠﻘﻃﺎﺕ ﺭ ﻳﺎﻀﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻠﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻮﺍﻷﺩﻮﺍﺕﺍﻠﻣﻭ ﺴﻴﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻠﺘﻲ ﺘﻌﻤﻝ ﻭﻏﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺣﻴﺕ ﻴﻤﻛﻧﻚ ﺪﺭﺍﺳﺘﻬﺎﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺘﺘﻴﺢ ﻠﻙ ﻫﺯﻩ ﺍﻠﻤﻴﺯﺓ ﺍﻠﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻠﺑﻄﻴ ٔ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺘﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻗﺭﺹ ‪DVD‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎﺀ ﺍﻠﺘﺸﻐﻳﻝ ‪،‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ) (‪. (∏∏) PAUSE/PLAY‬‬
‫‪. .٢‬ﺍﻀﻔﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪(k/K) SEARCH‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻠﺘﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻦ ‪ ٢/١‬ﻭ‪ ٤/١‬ﻭ‪ ٨/١‬ﻮ‪١٦/١‬ﻭ‪ ٢/١‬ﻠﻟﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﻌﺎﺩﻴﺔ ﺃﺜﻧﺎﺀ ﺍﻠﻭﻀﻊ ‪.PAUSE‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻟﻰ ﺰﺭ ‪) PLAY‬ﺘﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻠﻭﻈﺎﺌﻑ ﺍﻠﻣﺗﻗﺩﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻀﻐﻃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ‪ ENTER‬ﻠﺘﻨﺷﻴﻄ ﻮ ﻅﻴﻔﺔ ‪) Zoom‬ﺍﻠﺘﻛﺑﻴﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻠﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝﺇﻠﻰﻮﻇﻴﻓﺔ ‪ Angle‬ﺍﻠﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺽﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ‪ DVD‬ﻬﺎﻮﻆﺎﺋﻒﺯﺍﻮﻳﺔﺃﻜﺛﺭﺑﻛﺛﻳﺭﻣﻣﺎﻔﻲ ﺃﻳﺔﺼﻮﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻀﺒﻃ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺮﺘﻔﺎﻉ ٳﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻌﺮﺾ )‪(EZ View‬‬
‫ﻠﻠﺘﺷﻐﻴﻞ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﺨﺪﺍﻢ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺮﺘﻔﺎﻉ ٳﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻌﺮﺾ )‪(DVD‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺣﺩﺍﻢ ﻗﺎﺌﻣﺗﻲ ﺍﻠﻌﻨﺎﻮﻳﻥ ﻮﺍﻷﻘﺭﺍﺺ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎﺀ ﺘﺸﻐﻳﻝ ﻘﺭﺹ ‪ ،DVD‬ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Title Menu/Disc Menu‬ﺒﻮﺤﺩﺓ ﺍﻠﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ‬
‫ ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺘﻌﻤﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻓﺔ ‪ Title Menu/Disc menu‬ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻠﻟﻘﺮﺺ‪.‬‬‫ ﻜﺬﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻴﻤﻛﻧﻚ ﺍﺳﺗﺨﺩﺍﻡ ﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻘﺮﺍﺺ‪ ،‬ﺒﺎﺴﺗﺨﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺮ ‪ MENU DISC‬ﺒﻭﺤﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻜﻡ ﻋﻦ ﺒُﻌﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺴﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪ Title Menu‬ﻓﻘﻈ ﻔﻲ ﺤﺎﻠﺔ ﻭﺧﻭﺪ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻗﺭﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪) Chapter‬ﺒﺎﺏ( ‪ :‬ﻠﺗﻜﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻠﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻠﺤﺎﺮﻱ ﺘﺸﻐﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪) REPEAT A-B‬ﺘﻛﺭﺍﺭ ‪(DVD-D360K) (A-B‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺧﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻆﻳﻔﺔ ‪(DVD-D360K) A-B Repeat‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺜﻧﺎﺀ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ REPEAT‬ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺣﻜﻢ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺴﺧﺪﻢ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ †‪ π/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ، REPEAT A-B‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ® ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺯﺭ ‪ ENTER‬ﻋﻧﺪ ﺍﻠﻣﻭﻀﻊ ﺍﻠﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺘﻛﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻠﺘﺸﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻩ ﴿‪.﴾A‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺯﺭ ‪ ENTER‬ﻋﻧﺪ ﺍﻠﻣﻭﻀﻊ ﺍﻠﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺇﻴﻘﺎﻑ ﺘﻛﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻠﺘﺸﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻩ ﴿‪.﴾B‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺧﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻆﻳﻔﺔ ‪(DVD-D530K/DVD-D530) A-B Repeat‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺜﻧﺎﺀ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ REPEAT A-B‬ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺣﻜﻢ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺯﺭ ‪ REPEAT A-B‬ﻋﻧﺪ ﺍﻠﻣﻭﻀﻊ ﺍﻠﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺘﻛﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻠﺘﺸﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻩ ﴿‪.﴾A‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺯﺭ ‪ REPEAT A-B‬ﻋﻧﺪ ﺍﻠﻣﻭﻀﻊ ﺍﻠﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺇﻴﻘﺎﻑ ﺘﻛﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻠﺘﺸﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻩ ﴿‪.﴾B‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻠﻠﺮﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺘﺷﻌﻳﻝ ﺍﻠﻌﺎﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ‪ REPEAT A-B‬اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ر‪ :‬ﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻜﺮار إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪.(Repeat: Off‬‬
‫‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ‪ EZ VIEW/TOOLS‬ﺒﻮﺤﺩﺓ ﺍﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺗﻇﻬﺭ ﺸﺎﺸﺔ ﺍﻠﺗﻛﻠﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫‪ .٢‬اﺿﻐﻂ زر ﻋﺮض هـ ت ‪ EZ VIEW‬أو †‪ π/‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺣﺠﻢ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻜﻞ ﻣﺮة ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ زر ﻫـت ®‪ √/‬أو †‪ π/‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮف ﻋﻠﻰ أﺷﻜﺎل ﺣﺠﻢ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ وﻗﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻼت اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻬﺎ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬اﻧﻈﺮ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد أدﻧﺎﻩ‬
‫‪ .٣‬اﺿﻐﻂ زر ﺧﺮوج ‪ EXIT/RETURN‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮوج ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮض ﻫت )‪(EZ VIEW‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺘﺴﺘﺨﺩﻢ ﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺑﻨﺴﺑﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺘﻓﺎﻉ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻌﺮﺾ ‪٩�١٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺘﺴﺘﺨﺩﻢ ﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺘﻴﻔﺰﻴﻭﻦ ﺑﻨﺴﺑﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺘﻓﺎﻉ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻌﺮﺾ ‪٣�٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺗﻳﻊ ﺘﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺘﺸﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻠﻤﺎﺪﺓ ﺍﻠﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﻔﺼﻝ ﺃﻮﺍﻠﻌﻧﻭ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻠﺤﺎﻠﻲ ﺃﻮ ﻘﺴﻡ ﻣﺨﺗﺎﺭ ﴿‪﴾A-B‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﻘﺭﺹ ﺑﺂﻛﻣﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻠﻸﻗﺭﺍﺺ ﺍﻠﺘﻲ ﺘﻌﻤﻝ ﺑﻨﺴﺑﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺘﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻌﺮﺾ ‪٩�١٦‬‬
‫ ‪WIDE SCREEN‬‬‫ ‪SCREEN FIT‬‬‫‪ZOOM FIT -‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻳﻝ ﻗﺭﺹ ‪DVD/VCD‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ‪ REPEAT‬ﺒﻮﺤﺩﺓ ﺍﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺗﻇﻬﺭ ﺸﺎﺸﺔ ﺍﻠﺗﻛﻠﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻀﺒﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ ‪ REPEAT‬ﺃﻭ †‪ π/‬ﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﻀﻊ ﺍﻠﺘﺷﻐﻴﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﺮﺭ ﻗﺭﺺ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻳﻝ ﺤﺳﺏ ﺍﻠﻓﺻﻝ ﺃﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺇﻴﻗﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬‫‪) Title -‬ﺍﻠﻌﻨﻮﺍﻦ( ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻠﺤﺎﺮﻱ ﺘﺸﻐﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻠﻸﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻠﺗﻲ ﺘﻌﻣﻞ ﺑﻧﺴﺑﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺘﻓﺎﻉ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻌﺭﺾ ‪٣�٤‬‬
‫ ‪Normal Wide‬‬‫ ‪SCREEN FIT‬‬‫ ‪ZOOM FIT‬‬‫‪Vertical Fit -‬‬
‫ﻠﻸﻗﺭﺍﺺ ﺬﺍﺕ ﻨﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺘﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻌﺮﺾ ‪٩�١٦‬‬
‫ ‪4:3 Letter Box‬‬‫ ‪4:3 Pan Scan‬‬‫ ‪SCREEN FIT‬‬‫‪ZOOM FIT -‬‬
‫ﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻠﺘﺷﻐﻴﻝ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻠﻸﻗﺭﺍﺺ ﺍﻠﺗﻲ ﺘﻌﻣﻞ ﻨﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺘﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻌﺮﺾ ‪٣�٤‬‬
‫ ‪Normal Screen‬‬‫ ‪SCREEN FIT‬‬‫‪ZOOM FIT -‬‬
‫ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ‬
‫ﻘﺪ ﺗﺆﺪﻱ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻠﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺇﻠﻰ ﻧﺗﺎﺌﺞ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻠﻘﺭﺹ�‬
‫ﺘﺣﺪﻴﺪ ﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺕ‬
‫ﻴﻤﻛﻨﻙ ﺘﺣﺪﻴﺪ ﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺕ ﺍﻠﻤﻃﺎﻭﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺴﺮﻴﻊ ﻭﺴﻬﻝ ﺑﺎﺴﺘﺧﺪﺍﻢ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.AUDIO‬‬
‫ﺍﺴﺘﺧﺪﺍﻢ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ‪(DVD/VCD/MPEG4) AUDIO‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ √‪ .AUDIO /‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺕ ﻋﻧﺪ ﺍﻠﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻤﺘﻜﺮﺮ‪. .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ‪AUDIO‬‬
‫أو †‪.π/‬‬
‫ ﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺾ ﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺴﺘﺧﺪﺍﻢ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪ .٢‬ﻹﺰﺍﻠﺔ ﺍﻠﺭﻤﺰ ‪ ، AUDIO‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯ ‪.EXIT/RETURN‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻇﺔ‬
‫ ﺘﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻠﻭﻆﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺕ ﺍﻠﺘﻲ ﺘﻢ ﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺘﻌﻤﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻦ ﻳﺣﺘﻭﻯ ﻗﺮ ﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺎ ﻴﺼﻝ ﺇﻠﻰ‪ ٨‬ﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻠﺘﺮﺠﻤﺔ ﺍﻠﻣﺼﺎﺣﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺴﺗﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻤﻤﻴﺯ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺜﻧﺎﺀ ﻭ ﻀﻊ ﺍﻠﺘﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻴﻘﺎﻒ ﺍﻠﻤﺆﻘﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ‪ MARKER‬ﺑﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻠﺘﺣﻜﻢﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺻﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻳﻥ ®‪ √/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ †‪ π/‬ﻠﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﻤﻳﺯ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ )‪ PLAY (‬ﻟﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻠﺷﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻣﹸﻤﻳﺯ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻤﺴﺢ ﻋﻼﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺜﻧﺎﺀ ﻭ ﻀﻊ ﺍﻠﺘﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻴﻘﺎﻒ ﺍﻠﻤﺆﻘﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ‪ MARKER‬ﺑﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻠﺘﺣﻜﻢﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻳﻦ ®‪ √/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ †‪ π/‬ﻠﺗﺤﺩﻴﺪ ﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻠﻌﻼﻤﺔ ﺍﻠﻄﻠﻭﺐ ﺤﺫﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯ ‪ ENTER‬ﻠﺤﺬﻒ ﺭﻘﻡ ﺍﻠﻌﻼﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺴﺘﺧﺪﺍﻢ ﻭﻆﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻠﺘﻜﺑﻳﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻠﺘﺼﻐﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺴﺘﺧﺪﺍﻢ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪) Zoom‬ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪(DVD/VCD‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺜﻧﺎﺀ ﻭ ﻀﻊ ﺍﻠﺘﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻴﻘﺎﻒ ﺍﻠﻤﺆﻘﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ TOOLS‬ﺑﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻠﺘﺣﻜﻢﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬ﻠﺘﻜﺑﻴﺮ ﺒﻨﺴﺑﺔ ‪ X٤,X٣,X٢,X١.‬ﺑﺎﻠﺘﺮ ﺘﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻀﺒﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ †‪ π/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪/MPEG4/JPEG/WMA/MP3‬ﻗﺮﺺ ﺍﻠﻣﻀﻐﻭﻄ‬
‫ﻴﻤﻛﻨﻙ ﺘﺣﺪﻴﺪ ﺍﻠﺘﺭﺠﻤﺔ ﺍﻠﻤﺼﺎﺠﺒﺔ ﺍﻠﻤﻃﺎﻭﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺴﺮﻴﻊ ﺑﺎﺴﺘﺧﺪﺍﻢ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.SUBTITLE‬‬
‫ﺘﺣﺘﻭﻱ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺕ ﺍﻠﻣﻀﻐﻭﻃﺔ ﺃﻮ ﺍﻷ ﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻠﺘﻲ ﺘﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3/WMA/JPEG/MPEG4‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻏﺎٍﻦ ﺧﺎﺼﺔ ﻮ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺮ ﺍﻠﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺘﻧﻅﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻤﺟﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻋﻟﻰ ﺍﻠﻨﺣﻭ ﺍﻠﻤﻭﻀﺢ ﺃﺪﻨﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺘﺘﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻂﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺴﺘﺧﺪﺍﻢ ﺍﻠﻛﻤﺑﻳﻭﺘﺮ ﻠﻮﻀﻊ ﺍﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻤﺣﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﺧﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ )‪ .SUBTITLE (π‬ﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺾ ﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﺘﺮﺠﻣﺔ ﺍﻠﻣﺼﺎﺣﺑﺔ ﺍﻠﻤﺘﻭ ﺍﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺴﺘﺧﺪﺍﻢ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬اﺿﻐﻂ زر )‪ SUBTITLE (π‬أو †‪ π/‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻜﻞ ﻣﺮة ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ )‪ SUBTITLE (π‬أو †‪ π/‬ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ اﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻹﺰﺍﻠﺔ ﺍﻠﺭﻤﺰ ‪ ، SUBTITLE‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯ ‪.EXIT/RETURN‬‬
‫ﻠﺪﺧﻮل إﻟﻰ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪات واﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺴﺘﺧﺪﺍﻢ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ‪(DVD/MPEG4) SUBTITLE‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻇﺔ‬
‫ ﻴﺘﻢ ﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻠﺘﺮﺠﻤﺔ ﺍﻠﻣﺼﺎﺣﺑﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻠﻀﻐﻄ‬‫ ﻘﺩ ﺘﺤﺗﺎﺝ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺘﻐﻴﻳﺭ ﺍﻠﺘﺭﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻠﻪﺻﺎﺤﺑﺔ ﺍﻠﻤﻄﻟﻮﺒﺔ ﻔﻲ ﻘﺎﺌﻤﺔ ‪ Disc Menu‬ﺤﺳﺏ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻠﻘﺭﺹ‪ .‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺰﺭ ‪.DISC MENU‬‬‫ ﺘﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻠﻭﻆﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﺗﺭﺠﻤﺔ ﺍﻠﻤﺼﺎﺤﺒﺔ ﺍﻠﺘﻲ ﺘﻢ ﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺘﻌﻤﻝ ﻭﻘﺩ ﻻ ﺘﻌﻤﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻜﺎﻔﺔ ﺃﻘﺭﺍﺹ ‪.DVD‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻦ ﻴﺣﺗﻭ ﻯ ﻗﺭﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻋﻟﻰ ﻤﺎ ﻴﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٢‬ﻠﻐﺔ ﻠﻟﺘﺭﺠﻤﺔ ﺍﻠﻤﺼﺎﺤﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺇﺬﺍ ﻜﺎﻦ ﻗﺭﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻴﺣﺘﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﻭﺍﻴﺎ ﻤﺘﻌﺪﺪﺓ ﻠﻤﺷﻬﺪ ﻤﻌﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻴﻤﻛﻨﻚ ﺍﺴﺘﺧﺪﺍﻢ ﻭﻅﻴﻔﺔ ‪.ANGLE‬‬
‫ﺍﺴﺘﺧﺪﺍﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪) ANGLE‬ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺺ ‪(DVD‬‬
‫ﺇﺬﺍ ﻜﺎﻦ ﺍﻠﻘﺮﺹ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﻮﺍﻴﺎ ﻤﺘﻌﺪﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻅﻬﺮ ﺍﻠﻭﻅﻴﻔﺔ ‪ ANGLE‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺜﻧﺎﺀ ﻭ ﻀﻊ ﺍﻠﺘﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻴﻘﺎﻒ ﺍﻠﻤﺆﻘﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ‪ TOOLS‬ﺑﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻠﺘﺣﻜﻢﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻀﺒﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ ®‪ √/‬ﺃﻮ ﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺴﺘﺧﺩﺍﻢ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻘﺎﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻠﺘﺣﻛﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻴﺪ ﺍﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻠﻣﻄﻠﻭ ﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻀﺒﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ †‪ π/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺴﺘﺧﺪﺍﻢ ﻭﻆﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻠﻌﻼﻤﺎﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻠﻚ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻠﻴﺯﺓ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺯﺍﺀ ﻗﺭﺺ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭﻗﺭﺺ ‪) VCD‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ (Menu Off‬ﺑﺤﻳﺙ ﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻠﻭﺻﻭﻞ ﺇﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﺭﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻻﺤﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺴﺘﺧﺪﺍﻢ ﻭﻆﻳﻔﺔ )ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺺ ‪(DVD/VCD‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺜﻧﺎﺀ ﻭ ﻀﻊ ﺍﻠﺘﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻴﻘﺎﻒ ﺍﻠﻤﺆﻘﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ‪ MARKER‬ﺑﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻠﺘﺣﻜﻢﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻠﻭﺼﻭﻝ ﺇﻠﻰ ﻤﺸﻬﺩ ﺍﻠﻣﻃﺎﻭﺏ ﺘﻤﻴﻳﺰﻩ‪،‬ﺍﺻﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻳﻥ ®‪ √/‬ﺍﻠﺯﺭ †‪ π/‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .MARKER‬ﻴﻣﻛﻦ ﺘﻣﻴﻳﺰ ﺤﺘﻰ ‪ ١٢‬ﻤﺸﺎﻫﺩ ﻔﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻠﻮﺍﺤﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻇﺔ‬
‫‪ -‬ﻗﺪﻻ ﺘﻌﻣﻞ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪ Bookmark‬ﺤﺳﺏ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻠﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺪﺮﺝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪ .‬ﻀﻊ ﺍﻠﻘﺭﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻠﺪﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻠﺪﺮﺝ‪ .‬ﺗﻐﻠﻖ اﻟﻌﻠﺒﺔ وﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ )‪) (Parent Folder Menu‬اﻟﺼﻮرة اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫أﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ(‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺘﻮي اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪات اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪات اﻟﺸﺒﻴﻬﺔ )‪ (Peer‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻀﻢ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻧﻮع اﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮى‬
‫اﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬اﻟﺼﻮر‪ ،‬اﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬اﺿﻐﻂ أزرار ®‪ √/‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ زر إدﺧﺎل)‪(ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪات اﻟﺸﺒﻴﻬﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻀﻢ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪات اﻟﺸﺒﻴﻬﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪات اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻧﻮع اﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮى‬
‫)ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮر‪ ،‬اﻟﺦ( اﻟﻤﻮ ﺟﻮد ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪات اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺪﺓ‬
‫\ ﺍﻠﻔﻴﺩﻴﻮ‬
‫‪1/2‬‬
‫ﺘﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪CD‬‬
‫ﺘﺣﺪﻴﺪ ﺍﻨﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﻴﻤﻛﻦ ﺘﺤﺪﻴﺩ ﺍﻠﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻜﻝ ﻤﻦ ﺍﻠﻭﻀﻊ ‪ Stop‬ﺃﻮ ‪.Play‬‬
‫ ﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻠﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻠﺮﺌﻳﺴﻲ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ‪ RETURN‬ﻠﻼﻨﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻣﺟﻟﺩ ﺍﻠﺭﺌﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻮ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮﻴﻦ †‪ π/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ "‪ "..‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻟﻰ ‪ ENTER‬ﻜﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻝ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻠﺭ ﺌﻳﺴﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻠﺘﺤﺩﻴﺩ ﺍﻠﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻠﻨﻅﻴﺭ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮﻴﻦ †‪ π/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻠﻤﺠﻠﺩ ﺍﻠﻤﻃﻠﻭﺏ ﺜﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ ﻠﺘﺤﺩﻴﺩ ﺍﻠﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻠﻔﺭﻋﻲ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮﻴﻦ †‪ π/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻠﻤﺠﻠﺩ ﺍﻠﻤﻃﻠﻭﺏ ﺜﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺘﺸﻐﻴﻝ ﺼﻭﺕ ‪/WMA/MP3‬ﺍﻠﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻠﻣﺿﻐﻮﻄ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪ .‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻠﻘﺭ ﺺ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻠﺩﺭﺝ‪ .‬ﺃﻏﻟﻖ ﺍﻠﺪﺮﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ ®‪ √/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻴﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ .ENTER‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ †‪ π/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻴﺩ ﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ENTER‬ﺇﺩﺨﺎﻞ( ﻠﺑﺪﺀ ﺘﺷﻐﻴﻝ ﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻠﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻠﺘﺷﻐﻴﻝ ﺍﻠﻌﺷﻭﺍﺌﻲ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ REPEAT‬ﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻝ‪ .‬ﺘﻭﺠﺪ ﺃﺮﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭﺿﺎ ﻉ ﺘﺸﻐﻴﻝ ‪ Off‬ﻮ ‪ Track‬ﻮ ‪ Folder‬ﻮ ‪.Random‬‬
‫ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ‬
‫ ‪) Off‬ﺇﻴﻗﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ( ) (‪ :‬ﺗﺷﻐﻴﻝ ﻋﺎﺪﻱ‬‫‪1‬‬
‫)ﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﻤﻮﺴﻳﻘﻰ( ) ‪ :( 1‬ﻠﺘﻜﺮﺍﺮ ﻤﻟﻒ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻳﺔ ﺍﻠﺣﺎﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪Track‬‬‫ ‪) Folder‬ﻤﺟﻠﺪ( ) (‪ :‬ﻠﺘﻜﺮﺍﺮ ﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻨﻲ ﺍﻠﻣﺘﺷﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻤﺘﺪﺍﺪ ﺑﺘﺮ ﺘﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﻠﺌﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬
‫)ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺌﻲ( ) (‪ :‬ﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺘﺷﻐﻴﻝ ﻤﻠﻔﺎﺖ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻨﻲ ﺍﻠﻣﺘﻄﺎﺒﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻤﺗﺪ ﺍﺪ ﺑﺘﺮﺘﻴﺐ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪Random‬‬‫ﻻ ﺴﺘﺌﻨﺎﻒ ﺍﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻝ ﺍﻠﻌﺎﺪﻱ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻀﻐﻃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ REPEAT‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻜﺮار ‪ :‬ﺇﻴﻗﺎﻑ )‪.(Repeat: Off‬‬
‫ﻤﻠﻑ ‪ MP3/WMA‬ﺒﻘﺭﺹ ‪CD-R‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺘﺳﺠﻴﻝ ﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﺃﻭ ‪ WMA‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻘﺭﺹ ‪ CDR‬ﻴﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﻠﺭﺠﻭﻏ ﺇﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻴﺠﺏ ﺃﻦ ﺘﻜﻮﻦ ﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﺃﻭ ‪ WMA‬ﺒﺘﻨﺳﻴﻖ ‪ ISO 9660‬ﺃﻭ ‪.JOLIET‬‬‫ﻴﺘﻭﺍﻔﻕ ﺘﻧﺳﻳﻖ ‪ ISO 9660‬ﻭ ‪ Joliet‬ﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﺃﻭ ‪ WMA‬ﻤﻊ ﻨﻅﺎﻢ ﺍﺘﺸﻐﻳﻝ ‪ Microsoft DOS‬ﻭ ‪ Microsoft Windows‬ﻭﻨﻅﺎﻢ ﺍﻠﺘﺸﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ Apple Mac‬ﻭﻫﻭ ﺍﻠﺘﻧﺳﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﻜﺛﺭ ﺍﺴﺘﺨﺩﺍﻤﹰﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺘﺳﻤﻴﺔ ﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،WMA‬ﻴﺠﺏ ﺉﻻﻴﺘﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ‪ ٨‬ﺤﺭﻭﻑ ﻭﻴﺠﺏ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ”‪ mp3.‬ﻮ ‪ “wma.‬ﻜﺎﻤﺘﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻠﻤﻠﻑ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻠﺘﻨﺳﻴﻖ ﺍﻠﻌﺎﻢ ﻠﻼﺴﻢ ‪ Title.mp3 :‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .Title.wma‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺘﻛﻭﻴﻦ ﺍﻠﻌﻧﻮﺍﻦ‪ ،‬ﺘﺄﻜﺪ ﻤﻦ ﺍﺴﺘﺧﺩﺍﻢ ‪ ٨‬ﺤﺭﻭﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻘﻝ ﻮﻋﺪﻢ ﻭﺠﻭﺪ ﻤﺳﺎﻔﺎﺕ ﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻮﺘﺠﻨﺏ ﺍﺴﺘﺧﺪﺍﻢ ﺍﻠﺤﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻠﺧﺎﺼﺔ ﺒﻤﺎ ﻔﻲ ﺫﻠﻚ ‪.(+=،\،/،.) :‬‬
‫‬
‫ ﺍﺴﺘﺧﺩﻢ ﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﻨﻗﻝ ﻔﻚ ﺿﻐﻄ ﻻ ﻴﻗﻝ ﻋﻦ ‪ ١٢٨‬ﻜﻴﻠﻮ ﺒﺎﻴﺕ ﻔﻲ ﺍﻠﺛﺎﻨﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺘﺳﺠﻴﻞ ﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪MP3‬‬‫ﺘﻌﺘﻤﺩ ﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺼﻮﺕ ﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﺒﺸﻜﻝ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻠﺿﻐﻃ‪/‬ﻔﻚ ﺍﻠﺿﻐﻄ ﺍﻠﻤﺤﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻴﺘﻄﻠﺏ ﺍﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺼﻭﺕ ﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺕ ﺍﻠﻤﺿﻐﻭﻄ ﺘﻭﻔﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻝ ﻋﻴﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭﻱ‪/‬ﻘﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺒﻤﺎ ﻴﻌﻧﻲ ﺍﻠﺘﺤﻮﻴﻝ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺘﻧﺳﻴﻖ ‪ ،MP3‬ﺒﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻴﻗﻝ ﻋﻦ ‪ ١٢٨‬ﻜﻴﻠﻮ ﺒﺎﻴﺕ ﻔﻲ ﺍﻠﺛﺎﻨﻳﺔ ﻭﺤﺘﻰ ‪ ١٦٠‬ﻜﻴﻠﻭ ﺒﺎﻴﺕ ﻔﻲ ﺍﻠﺛﺎﻨﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺒﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻠﻤﻌﺩﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﻤﺛﻝ ‪ ١٩٢‬ﻜﻳﻠﻮ ﺒﺎﻴﺕ ﻔﻲ ﺍﻠﺛﺎﻨﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻤﺎﻴﺰﻴﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺤﺼﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺠﻭﺩﺓ ﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻔﺿﻝ ﺇﻻ ﻔﻲ ﺍﻠﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻠﻧﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺒﺎﻠﻌﻜﺲ‪ ،‬ﻠﻦ ﻴﺗﻢ ﺘﺸﻐﻴﻝ ﺍﻠﻤﻟﻔﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻤﻌﺩﻝ ﻔﻚ ﺍﻠﺿﻐﻄ ﺍﻠﺫﻱ ﻴﻗﻝ ﻋﻦ ‪ ١٢٨‬ﻜﻳﻠﻭ ﺒﺎﻴﺕ ﻔﻲ ﺍﻠﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺒﺸﻜﻝ ﺼﺤﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﺴﺘﺧﻢ ﻤﻌﺩﻝ ﻨﻘﻝ ﻔﻚ ﺿﻐﻄ ﻻ ﻴﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ‪ ٦٤‬ﻜﻴﻠﻭﺒﺎﻴﺕ ﻔﻲ ﺍﻠﺛﺎﻨﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺘﺳﺠﻴﻝ ﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪WMA‬‬‫ﺘﻌﺘﻤﺩ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺼﻮﺕ ﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ WMA‬ﺒﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﻌﺩﻞ ﺍﻠﺿﻐﻄ‪/‬ﻔﻚ ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﺍﻠﻤﺤﺪ‪ .‬ﻴﺘﻄﻠﺏ ﺍﻠﺤﺼﻮﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺼﻭﺕ ﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺕ ﺍﻠﻤﺿﻐﻭﻄ ﺘﻮﻔﺮ ﻤﻌﺪﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭﻱ‪/‬ﺭﻘﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺒﻤﺎ ﻴﻌﻧﻲ ﺍﻠﺘﺤﻮﻴﻞ ﺇﻠﻲ ﺘﺳﻴﻖ ‪ ،WMA‬ﺒﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻴﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ‪ ٦٤‬ﻜﻴﻠﻮ ﺒﺎﻴﺕ ﻔﻲﺍﻠﺜﺎﻨﻳﺔ ﻮﺤﺘﻰ ‪ ١٩٢‬ﻜﻴﻠﻭ ﺒﺎﻴﺕ ﻔﻲ ﺍﻠﺛﺎﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻮﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻌﻜﺱ‪ ،‬ﻠﻦ ﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺘﺷﻐﻴﻝ ﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ WMA‬ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﻦ ‪ ٣٠‬ﻜﻠﻭ ﻫﺭﺘﺰ‪ ١٩٢ .‬ﻜﻳﻠﻭ ﺒﺎﻴﺕ ﻔﻲ ﺍﻠﺜﺎﻨﻳﺔ ﺒﺸﻜﻝ ﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻤﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻠﻌﻴﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﺫﻱ ﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺩﻋﻤﻪ‬
‫ ﻻ ﺘﺳﺟﻴﻝ ﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﺍﻠﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺒﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺤﻘﻭﻖ ﺍﻠﻄﺒﻊ ﻮﺍﻠﻧﺸﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺘﻢ ﺘﺸﻔﻴﺭ ﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ”ﺍﻠﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ“ ﻮﺤﻤﺎﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺒﺎﻠﺭﻤﻭﺰ ﻠﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻠﻨﺳﺦ ﻏﻴﺭ ﺍﻠﻘﺎﻨﻮﻨﻲ‪ .‬ﺘﺗﻤﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻨﻭﺍﻏ ﺍﻵﺘﻴﺔ ‪Windows MediaTM :‬‬
‫)ﻋﻼﻤﺔ ﺘﺠﺎﺭﻴﺔ ﻤﺳﺠﻠﺔ ﻠﺸﺭﻜﺔ ‪ (Microsoft Inc‬ﻭ ‪) SDMITM‬ﻋﻼﻤﺔ ﺘﺟﺎﺭﻴﺔ ﻤﺳﺠﻠﺔ ﻠﻠﺸﺭﻜﺔ ‪ .(SDMI Foundation‬ﻻ ﻴﻤﻜﻧﻚ ﻨﺳﺦ ﻤﺜﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻫﺎﻢ ‪:‬‬‫ﻻ ﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻠﺘﻭﺼﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﻣﺫﻜﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻀﻤﺎﻨﹰﺎ ﺒﺄﻦ ﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻘﺭﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺴﻴﻗﻮﻢ ﺒﺘﺸﻐﻴﻝ ﺘﺳﺠﻴﻼﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﺃﻭ ﺘﺄﻜﻴﺩًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺠﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻠﺼﻮﺖ‪ .‬ﻴﺟﺏ ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻦ ﺒﻌﺾ ﺘﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺴﺎﻠﻴﺏ ﺘﺳﺠﻴﻝ ﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻘﺭﺍﺹ ‪ CD-Rs‬ﺘﻤﻧﻊ ﺍﻠﺘﺷﻐﻴﻝ ﺍﻷﻤﺛﻝ ﻠﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﺧﺩﺍﻢ ﻤﺸﻌﻝ ﺃﻘﺭﺍﺹ ‪) DVD‬ﻜﺎﻨﺧﻔﺎﺾ ﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺕ ﻭﻋﺟﺯ ﺍﻠﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻔﻲ ﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻠﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻘﺭﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﻠﻤﺎﻔﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺘﺳﺘﻄﻳﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻠﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺘﺸﻐﻴﻝ ﺤﺘﻰ ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﻤﻠﻑ ﻮ ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﻤﺠﻠﺩ ﻜﺤﺩ ﺃﻘﺼﻰ ﻔﻲ ﺍﻠﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻠﻭﺍﺤﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺘﺸﻐﻴﻝ ‪MPEG4‬‬
‫ﻭﻆﻴﻔﺔ ﺘﺸﻐﻴﻝ ‪MPEG4‬‬
‫ﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺴﺘﺧﺩ ﺍﻢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ AVI‬ﺑﻐﺮﺾ ﺍﺤﺘﻭﺍﺀ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻴﻭ ﻭﺼﻭﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻼ ﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺘﺷﻐﻴﻝ ﺴﻭﻯ ﺍﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺒﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ AVI‬ﻓﻘﻄ ﺬﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻤﺘﺪﺍﺪ "‪.."avi.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪ .‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻠﻘﺭﺺ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻠﺩ ﺝ‪ .‬ﺃﻏﻟﻖ ﺍﻠﺪﺮﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ ®‪ √/‬ﻟﺘﺣﺪﻴﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ .ENTER‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ †‪ π/‬ﻟﺘﺣﺪﻴﺪ ﻤﻠﻒ ‪، (DivX/XviD) avi‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ‪ .ENTER‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ †‪ ،π/‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺘﻜﺮﺍﺮ ﺘﺸﻐﻴﻝ ﻮ ﺍﺴﺘﺧﺪﺍﻢ ﻮﻅﻴﻔﺔ ‪REPEAT A-B‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ‪ REPEAT‬ﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﻀﻊ ﺍﻠﺘﺷﻐﻴﻝ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﺎﻚ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻭﻀﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ )ﺇﻴﻗﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ( ‪ Off‬ﻭ )ﺍﻠﻌﻨﻮﺍﻦ( ‪ Title‬ﻭ )ﻤﺟﻠﺪ( ‪.Folder‬‬
‫ ﺇﻴﻗﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬‫ ‪) TItle‬ﺍﻠﻌﻨﻮﺍﻦ( ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻠﺤﺎﺮﻱ ﺘﺸﻐﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ‪) Folder‬ﻤﺟﻠﺪ( ‪ :‬ﻠﺘﻜﺭﺍﺮﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ AVI‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻤﺘﺪﺍﺪ ﺍﻠﻤﺘﻣﺎﺜﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻠﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻠﺣﺎﻠﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺧﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻆﻳﻔﺔ ‪(DVD-D360K) A-B Repeat‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺜﻧﺎﺀ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ REPEAT‬ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺣﻜﻢ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺴﺧﺪﻢ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ †‪ π/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ، REPEAT A-B‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ® ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺯﺭ ‪ ENTER‬ﻋﻧﺪ ﺍﻠﻣﻭﻀﻊ ﺍﻠﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺘﻛﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻠﺘﺸﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻩ ﴿‪.﴾A‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺯﺭ ‪ ENTER‬ﻋﻧﺪ ﺍﻠﻣﻭﻀﻊ ﺍﻠﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺇﻴﻘﺎﻑ ﺘﻛﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻠﺘﺸﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻩ ﴿‪.﴾B‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺧﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻆﻳﻔﺔ ‪(DVD-D530K/DVD-D530) A-B Repeat‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺜﻧﺎﺀ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ REPEAT A-B‬ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺣﻜﻢ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺯﺭ ‪ REPEAT A-B‬ﻋﻧﺪ ﺍﻠﻣﻭﻀﻊ ﺍﻠﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺘﻛﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻠﺘﺸﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻩ ﴿‪.﴾A‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺯﺭ ‪ REPEAT A-B‬ﻋﻧﺪ ﺍﻠﻣﻭﻀﻊ ﺍﻠﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺇﻴﻘﺎﻑ ﺘﻛﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻠﺘﺸﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻩ ﴿‪.﴾B‬‬
‫ ﻠﻠﺮﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺘﺷﻌﻳﻝ ﺍﻠﻌﺎﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ‪ REPEAT A-B‬اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ر‪ :‬ﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻜﺮار إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪.(Repeat: Off‬‬‫ﻭﺼﻒﻮﻅﻴﻔﺔ ‪MPEG4‬‬
‫ﺍﻠﻭﺼﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻠﻭﻆﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫‪Skip‬‬
‫)|‪ K‬ﺃﻮ ‪(|k‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻠﺘﺷﻐﻴﻝ‪ ,‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ‪ |k‬ﺃﻮ|‪ K‬ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ أو اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪Search‬‬
‫)‪ K‬ﺃﻮ ‪(k‬‬
‫ﺃﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺰﺮ ‪ k) SEARCH‬ﺃﻮ‪ (K‬ﻭﺍﻀﻐﻃ ﻤﺮﺓً ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻠﻠﺒﺣﺚ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻜﺑﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻴﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻠﺒﺣﺚ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻜﺑﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻠﻒ ‪.(٣٢X, ١٦X, ٨X, ٤X, ٢X) .AVI‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻝ ﺑﺎﻠﺣﺮﻜﺔ ﻠﺑﻃﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫‪ZOOM‬‬
‫ﻴﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻠﺒﺣﺚ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻠﻒ ‪( ١/١٦, ١/٨, ١/٤, ١/٢) .AVI‬‬
‫‪ X٤/X٣/X٢/X١/Normal‬ﺑﺎﻠﺘﺮ ﺘﻴﺐ‬
‫ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺘﻌﻤﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻠﻭﻅﺎﺌﻒ ﻭﺫﻠﻚ ﺣﺴﺏ ﻤﻠﻒ ‪.MPEG4‬‬‫ﻤﻠﻑ ‪ AVI‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪CD-R‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﻤﻜﺎﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺘﺷﻐﻴﻝ ﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻀﻐﻄ ﺍﻠﻔﻳﺪﻴﻮ ﺍﻠﺘﺎﻠﻴﺔ ﺪﺍﺧﻝ ﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻠﻤﺎﻒ ‪: AVI‬‬
‫ ﻤﺣﺘﻭﻴﺎﺕ ‪DivX 3.11‬‬‫ ﻤﺣﺘﻭﻴﺎﺕ ‪) DivX 4‬ﺣﺴﺐ ‪(MPEG-4 Simple Profile‬‬‫ ﻤﺣﺘﻭﻴﺎﺕ ‪) DivX 5‬ﺍﻠﻭﻀﻊ ﺍﻠﺒﺴﻴﻄ ﺍﻠﺧﺎﺹ ﺒ ‪ MPEG-4‬ﻋﻼﻭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻠﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻤﺜﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺮﺍﺕ ﺛﻨﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺘﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻜﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺪﻋﻢ ‪Qpel‬‬
‫ﻮ ‪ GMC‬ﺃﻴﻀًﺎ‪(.‬‬
‫ ﻤﺣﺘﻭﻴﺎﺕ ‪ Xvid‬ﻤﺘﻭ ﺍﻓﻗﺔ ﻤﻊ ‪.MPEG-4‬‬‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪DVD-RW & DVD+R‬‬
‫ﺍﻠﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻠﺬﻱ ﻴﺪﻋﻢ ‪:DivX‬‬
‫ ﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ DivX‬ﺍﻷﺴﺎﺴﻲ ‪DivX3.11/4.12/5.x‬‬‫‪) Xvid‬ﺑﺮﻨﺎﻤﺞ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻠﺘﺷﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻠﻤﺘﻭﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪ (MPEG-4‬ﻮ ‪DivX Pro‬‬
‫ ﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻠﻣﻠﻒ ‪*.avi, *.div, *.divx. :‬‬‫ﻴﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻠﺟﻬﺎﺰ ﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺪﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﺪﻗﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺪﻗﺔ ﻣﻌﺭﻭﻀﺔ ﺃﺪﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻴﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻠﺟﻬﺎﺰ ﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺪﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﺪﻗﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺪﻗﺔ ﻣﻌﺭﻭﻀﺔ ﺃﺪﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪DivX5‬‬
‫‪ ٤٨٠ x ٧٢٠‬ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭًﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻠﺛﺎﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٥٧٦ x ٧٢٠‬ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ٣٥‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭًﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻠﺛﺎﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺃﺼﻰ ﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﺎﺕ ‪ ٤ :‬ﻤﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻴﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻠﺛﺎﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺘﻅﻬﺮﺭﺴﺎﺌﻝ ﺘﺣﺫﻴﺮ ﻤﺣﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻤﺣﺎﻮﻠﺔ ﺘﺷﻐﻴﻝ ﻤﻠﻒ ‪: DivX‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻻ ﻴﻭﺠﺪ ﺘﺼﺮﻴﺢ‬
‫ ﺍﻠﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻠﻣﻨﺷﺄ ﺑﺮﻤﺰ ﺘﺴﺟﻴﻝ ﺧﻄﺄ‪.‬‬‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮ ﻨﺎﻤﺞ ﻓﻚ ﺘﺷﻔﻴﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻤﺪﻋﻭﻢ‬
‫ ﻤﻠﻒ ﺒﺈﺼﺪﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻓﻚ ﺘﺷﻔﻴﺮ ﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ )ﻤﺛﻝ‪ MP4 :‬ﻭ‬‫‪ AFS‬ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻤﺞ ﻓﻚ ﺘﺷﻔﻴﺮ ﻤﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ( ﻻ ﻴﺪﻋﻤﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻠﻤﺷﻐﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺪﻗﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻤﺪﻋﻮﻤﺔ‬
‫ ﺍﻠﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻠﺬﻱ ﻳﺣﺘﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺪﺮﺠﺎﺕ ﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﻦ ﻤﻭﺍﺼﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﻣﺷﻐﻝ‬‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻤﺪﻋﻭﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ‬
‫ ﺍﻠﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻠﺘﻲ ﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺪﻋﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﻭﺍﺴﻂﺔ ﺍﻠﻃﺭﺍﺯ ‪ DVD D530K/D530‬ﺘﺼﻝ ﺇﻠﻰ ‪ 480 x 720‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 30‬ﺇﻄﺎ ﺮًﺍ‪ 576 x 720 ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 25‬ﺇﻄﺎﺮًﺍ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺮ ﺘﺷﻐﻴﻝ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MPEG-4‬ﺍﻠﺘﻲ ﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺆﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺑﻴﻭ ﺘﺮﺸﺧﺼﻲ‪.‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻴﻔﺴﺮﺳﺑﺐﻋﺪﻢ ﺪﻋﻢ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻠﺘﺷﻔﻴﺮ ﻮﺍﻹﺼﺪﺍﺭ‬‫ﻭﺍﻠﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻣﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯﺓ ﻠﻠﻤﻮ ﺍﺼﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻴﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻠﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ CD-R/RW‬ﺍﻠﻤﻜﺘﻭ ﺑﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ MPEG4‬ﻮﺍﻠﻣﺘﻭ ﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻤﻊ ﺍﻠﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ "‪."ISO9660‬‬
‫اﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺮص اﻟﻤُﺪﻣَﺞ‬
‫ﺘﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻤﻟﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﻭﺴﺎﺌﻃ ﺒﺎﺴﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻤﻳﺯﺓ ﻤﺿﻳﻑ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻴﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺴﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﻤﻟﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﻭﺴﺎﺌﻁ ﻤﺛﻝ ﺍﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﻮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭ ﺍﻠﻧﻐﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﻣﺣﻓﻭﻈﺔ ﺒﻣﺷﻐﻝ ‪ MP3‬ﺃﻭ ﺬﺍﻜﺭﺓ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﻛﺍﻤﻳﺭ ﺍﻠﺭﻘﻣﻳﺔ ﺒﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﻤﺭﺘﻓﻊ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻴﻕ ﺘﻭﺼﻳﻝ ﻮﺤﺩﺓ ﺍﻠﺗﺧﺯﻴﻥ ﺒﻣﻧﻓﺫ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻠﻣﻭﺠﻭﺩ ﺒﻣﺷﻝ ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﺍﺴﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻤﻳﺯﺓ‪) USB HOST‬ﻤﺿﻳﻑ ‪(USB‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻘﻡ ﺒﺗﻭﺼﻳﻝ ﻭﺤﺩﺓ ‪ USB‬ﺒﻣﻧﻓﺫ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻠﻣﻭﺠﻭﺩ ﺒﺎﻠﺟﺯﺀ ﺍﻷﻤﺎﻤﻲ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺤﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻳﻮ إس ﺑﻲ )‪ ،(USB‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر ®‪ √/‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ENTER‬ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻓاﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰرﻳﻦ †‪ π/‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ‪ .USB‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ) ENTER‬ﻣﻮاﻓﻖ( ﻟﻔﺘﺢ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ‬
‫• وﻓﻲ آﻞ ﻣﺮة ﻳﺘﻢ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮف ﻳﻈﻬﺮ إﻃﺎر اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺟﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬
‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎر ”‪ “USB‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‪.‬‬
‫• اﻋﺘﻤﺎدا ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ وﻣﺪﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈن اﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ (USB‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮق وﻗﺘﺎ أآﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻲ دي أو دي ﻓﻲ دي ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪) USB MENU‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ (USB‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎز‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ اﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮظ‪.‬‬
‫• إذا آﺎﻧﺖ هﻨﺎك اﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ ،‬ﻓﺈن اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر دي ﻓﻲ دي )‪ (DVD-D530K/DVD-D530‬ﺃﻭ ﺰﺭ ‪(DVD-D360K) USB‬‬
‫ﻳﺆدي إﻟﻰ اﻟﺨﺮوج ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ )‪ (USB‬وﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫إزاﻟﺔ ‪ USB‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺁﻣﻦ‬
‫‪. .١‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر )‪ (DVD-D530K/DVD-D530‬ﺃﻭ ﺰﺭ ‪ (DVD-D360K) USB‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة إﻟﻰ وﺿﻊ اﻟﻘﺮص أو اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‪ .٢‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر)■( ‪) STOP‬إﻳﻘﺎف(‪.‬‬
‫‬
‫‪ .٣‬أزل ﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪.USB‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻸﻣﺎم‪/‬ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‬
‫أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر )|‪.(|k/K‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ وﺟﻮد أﻜﺛﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر )|‪.(K‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ وﺟﻮد أﻜﺛﺮ ﻣﻦﻣﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر )‪.(|k‬‬
‫▪‬
‫▪‬
‫▪‬
‫▪‬
‫▪‬
‫▪‬
‫وﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ دﻋﻢ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻟﺬي ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻧﻈﺎم ﻣﻠﻒ ‪) .NTFS‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ دﻋﻢ ﻧﻈﺎم ﻣﻠﻒ ‪) 32/16 FAT‬ﺟﺪول ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪.(32/16‬‬
‫وﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﻐﻼت ‪ MP3‬ﻋﻨﺩ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺬا اﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ وهﺬا ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻗﻄﺎع ﻧﻈﺎم اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮن وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ USB HOST‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ اﻟﺬي ﻳﻘﻮم ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤُﺼﻨﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ أﺟﻬﺰة ‪) MTP‬ﺑﺮوﺗﻮﻜﻮل ﻧﻘﻞ اﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ( اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗُﻤﻜﻦ ‪.Janus‬‬
‫وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻀﻴﻒ ‪ USB‬ﻟﻬﺬا اﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ آﺎﻓﺔ أﺟﻬﺰة ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﻴﻒ ﻳﻮ إس ﺑﻲ هﺬا ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﺸﻐﻼت اﻟﻘﺮص اﻟﺼﻠﺐ )‪.(HDD‬‬
‫‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻘﺮص ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ أﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪.(k/K‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﻜﻝ ﻣﺮة ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ أي ﻣﻦ اﻟﺰرﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻜﻤﺎ ‪.٣٢X o ١٦X o ٨X o ٤X o ٢X :‬‬
‫اﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﻤﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ .١‬وﺣﺪات ‪ USB‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ‪) USB Mass Storage v1.0.‬وﺣﺪات ‪ USB‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻜﻘﺮص ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺزاﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎم اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Windows‬‬
‫)اﻹﺻﺪار ‪ 2000‬أو اﻹﺻﺪار اﻷﺣﺪث( ﺑﺪون ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )إﺿﺎﻓﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ : MP3‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮع اﻟﻔﻼش وﻣﺤﺮك اﻷﻗﺮاص اﻟﺼﻠﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮا اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ‪ :‬اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮات اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ وﺣﺪات ‪.USB Mass Storagev1.0.‬‬
‫• اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮات اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ آﻘﺮص ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺزاﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎم اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪) Windows‬اﻹﺻﺪار ‪ 2000‬أو اﻹﺻﺪار اﻷﺣﺪث( ﺑﺪون ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ إﺿﺎﻓﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻣﺤﺮك أﻗﺮاص ﻓﻼش ‪ : USB‬اﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ‪ USB2.0‬أو ‪.USB1.1‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺠﺪ اﺧﺘﻼﻓًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻮدة اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ وﺣﺪة ‪.USB1.1‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﺎرئ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ : USB‬ﻗﺎرئ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ USB‬ذو ﻓﺘﺤﺔ واﺣﺪة وﻗﺎرئ ‪.USB‬‬
‫• وﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﺠﻬﺔ اﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﻗﺎرئ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.USB‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻮاﺟﻬﻚ ﻣﺸﻜﻼت‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺤﺎﻠﺔ ﺗﺮﻜﻴﺐ وﺣﺪات ذاﻜﺮة ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎرئ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎت ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ ،USB‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ اﻟﺘﻌﺮف ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪.USB‬‬
‫▪ ‪ CBI‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮم )ﺗﺤﻜﻢ‪/‬ﺗﻀﺨﻴﻢ‪/‬ﻗﻄﻊ(‬
‫▪ وأﻳﻀًﺎ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮات اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﺑﺮوﺗﻮآﻮل ‪ PTP‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ إﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﻤﻴﺰة ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺮص إﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪MP3‬‬
‫اﻓﺘﺢ درج اﻟﻘﺮص‪ .‬ﺿﻊ اﻟﻘﺮص اﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ )‪ (CD DA‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺪرج ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻗﻪ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ USB‬إﻟﻰ ﻣﻀﻴﻒ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ‪ ENTER‬ﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻠﻘﺮﺹ‪ .‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر )‪ (DVD-D530K/DVD-D530‬ﺃﻭ ﺰﺭ ‪(DVD-D360K) USB‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻋﻨﺪﻤﺎ ﺘﻛﻭﻦ ﺍﻠﻭ ﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭ ﻀﻊ ﺍﻹﻴﻘﺎﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻠﻌﺮﺾ ﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪) Ripping‬ﺍﻨﺳﺦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﺭ ﺍﺹ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬اﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻷزرار †‪ ،π/‬ﺛﻢ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰاﻟﺰر ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر ‪ ENTER‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ إﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ(‪.‬‬‫‪ .٣‬ﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ √ ﻭ † ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻴﺪ ‪) START‬ﺒﺪﺀ( ﻗﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﺍﻠﻧﺳﺦ ﻤﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮي ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻘﺺ )‪ (Ripping‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻷز رار اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ ﺍﻠﻭﻀﻊ )ﺴﺭﻴﻌﺔ‪(Normal/‬‬‫ ﻤﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻠﺒﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ ENTER‬ﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺭ ‪ 128‬ﻜﻴﻠﻭ ﺑﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻠﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺇﻠﻰ ‪ 192‬ﻜﻴﻠﻭ ﺑﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻠﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻮ ‪ 128‬ﻜﻴﻠﻭ ﺑﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻠﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ‪...‬‬‫ ﺘﺣﺪﻴﺪ ﺍﻠﺠﻬﺎﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ ENTER‬ﻠﻠﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻳﻦ ﺍﻷ ﺠﻬﺯ ﺓ )ﺒﺣﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪(4‬‬‫ ﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻠﻐﺎﺀ ﺘﺣﺪﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻀﻐﻃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ‪ ENTER‬ﻠﻠﺘﻐﺘﻐﻳﻳﺮ ﻤﻦ ﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻠﻜﻝ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ ﺒﻼ‪.‬‬‫ ﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻠﻨﺳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻀﻐﻃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ‪ ENTER‬ﻠﺑﺪ ﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻠﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬‫ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ‬
‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻓﻴﺪ اﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ زر إدﺧﺎل )‪(ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻠﻠﻌﻮﺪﺓ ﺇﻠﻰﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،CDDA‬ﺍﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻣﺮ ﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ اﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺮص اﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺳﻮف ﻳﺼﺒﺢ اﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• اﻷﻗﺮاص اﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ )‪ (CD DA‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻷﻦ ﺍﻠﺴﺮ ﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺎﺪﻝ ‪ 2.6‬ﻀﻌﻒ ﻤﻦ ﺍﻠﺴﺮ ﻋﺔ ﺍﻠﻌﺎﺪﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﻃﻴﻊ ﺍﻠﻣﺴﺘﺧﺪﻢ ﺘﺸﻐﻴﻝ ‪ CDDA‬ﻤﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻴﺔ ﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻷﻗﺮ ﺍﺹ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ زر ﻳﻮ إس ﺑﻲ )‪ (USB‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮن ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻘﺺ )‪.(Ripping‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻗﺘﺼﺎص اﻟﺴﻲ دي )‪ (Ripping‬ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﻐﻼت ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪.MP3‬‬
‫ﺘﺷﻐﻴﻝ ﺍﻠﻘﺭﺺ ﺍﻠﺫﻱ ﻴﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺼﻭﺮ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺣﺪﺪ ﺍﻠﻤﺠﺎﺪ ﺍﻠﻤﻃﻠﻭ ﺐ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ†‪ π/‬ﻠﺘﺤﺩﻳﺩ ﻤﻟﻒ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺳﺓ ﻔﻲ ﻘﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﺍﻠﻤﻘﺎﻄﻊ ﺜﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ‬
‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺳ ‪ STOP‬ﻠﻟﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻠﻰ ﻘﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﺍﻠﻤﻘﺎﻄﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻋﻨﺩ ﺘﺸﻐﻴﻝ ﻘﺭﺹ ‪ ،Kodak Picture CD‬ﺘﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻠﻭﺤﺩﺓﺍﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭﺓﹰ ﻮﻠﻴﺲ ﻘﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﺍﻠﻤﻘﺎﻄﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻠﺘﺩﻮﻴﺭ‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮﻴﻦ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻴﺩ ﺍﻠﻭﺠﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ ﻓﻲ ﻜﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻠﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ®‪ √/‬ﺘﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺭﺓ ‪ 90‬ﺪﺭﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻗﺎﺮ ﺐ ﺍﻠﺴﺎ ﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻓﻲ ﻜﻝ ﻣﺮ ﺓ ﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻠﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺮ ‪ ، π‬ﺴﻭ ﻑ ﺘﻨﻌﻛﺲ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺮﺓ ﺮﺃﺴًﺎﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻠﻌﺮ ﺽ ﺼﻭ ﺭ ﺓ ﻤﻌﻜﻭ ﺴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻓﻲ ﻜﻝ ﻣﺮ ﺓ ﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻠﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺮ † ‪ ،‬ﺴﻭ ﻑ ﺘﻨﻌﻛﺲ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺮﺓﺇﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺠﺎ ﻨﺐ ﺍﻠﺼﺣﻴﺢ ﻠﻌﺮ ﺽ ﺼﻭ ﺭ ﺓ ﻤﻌﻜﻭ ﺴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Zoom‬‬
‫ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮﻴﻦ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻴﺩ ﺘﻜﺒﻳﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪..ENTER‬‬‫ ﻓﻲ آﻞ ﻣﺮة ﻳﺘﻢ اﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ ENTER‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ اﻟﺼﻮرة‪ .‬وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪. X١-X٤-X٣-X٢-X١ :‬‬‫‪Slide Show‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻋﻨﺪﻤﺎ ﻨﻘﻭﻢ ﺒﺎﻠﻨﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰﺯﺮ )ﺍﻠﺪﺧﻭﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻠﺘﺷﻐﻴﻝ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ Jpeg‬ﺴﻮﻒ ﺘﻨﺘﻘﻝ ﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺓ ﺇﻠﻰ ﻭ ﺿﻊ ﺍﻠﺷﺎﺸﺔ ﺍﻠﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺭ ﺾ ﺍﻠﺷﺮ ﺍﺌﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺌﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ‬
‫ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻠﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻘﺪﺍﺮ ﺍﻠﻔﺎ ﺼﻝ ﺒﻳﻦ ﻜﻝ ﺼﻭ ﺮﺓ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔًﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻠﺪ ﻠﻴﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻠﻢ ﻴﺗﻢ ﺍﻠﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺮ‪ ،‬ﻔﺴﻴﺑﺪﺃ ﻋﺭ ﺾ ﺍﻠﺷﺮﺍﺌﺢ ﺘﻠﻘﺎ ﺌﻳًﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻭ ﺍٍﻦ ﺑﺷﻜﻝ ﺍﻔﺘﺭ ﺍﻀﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺘﺷﻐﻴﻝ ﺍﻠﻘﺭﺺ ﺍﻠﺫﻱ ﻴﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺼﻭﺮ ‪(DVD-D530K/DVD-D530) JPEG-HD‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺏ ﺍﻠﺘﻭ ﺼﻳﻝ ﺑ ‪. HDMI‬ﺘﺠﺐ ﺃﻦ ﺘﺑﻠﻎ ﺍﻠﺪﻗﺔ ‪ 720p/1080i/1080p‬ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ‪ HD-JPEG‬ﻔﻲ ﺍﻠﻭ ﻀﻊ ‪.HD‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺤﺪﺪ ﺍﻠﻤﺟﻠﺪ ﺍﻠﻤﻄﻠﻭﺐ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻃرﻋﻟﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻥ †‪ π/‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻤﻟﻑ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﻔﻲ ﻔﺎﺌﻣﺔ ﺍﻠﻣﻗﺎﻄﻊ ﺜﻡ ﺍﻀﻐﻃ ﻋﻟﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ ﺍﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻟﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ (■) STOP‬ﻠﻟﻌﻭﺪﺓ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺌﻣﺔ ﺍﻠﻣﻗﺎﻄﻊ‪.‬‬‫ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺘﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻘﺭﺹ ‪ ،Kodak Picture CD‬ﻴﻌﺭﺽ ﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﻤﺑﺎﺸﺭﺓً ﻭﻠﻳﺱ ﻘﺎﺌﻣﺔ ﺍﻠﻣﻗﺎﻄﻊ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﻠﺗﺩﻭﻴﺭ‬‫ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮﻴﻦ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻴﺩ ﺍﻠﻭﺠﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ .ENTER‬ﺍﻀﻐﻃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ®‪ √/‬ﻠﺗﺩﻭﻴﺭﺍﻠﺷﺎﺸﺔ ﺒﻣﻗﺩﺍﺭ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺪﺭﺠﺔ‬‫ﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻠﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ /‬ﺍﻠﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺘﺧﻃﻲ ﺍﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻀﻐﻁ ﻋﻟﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ |‪ K‬ﺃﻭ ‪ |k‬ﻠﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻠﺳﺎﺒﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺗﺎﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‬
‫ ‪Zoom‬‬‫ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺮﻴﻦ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻴﺩ ﺘﻜﺒﻳﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪..ENTER‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ آﻞ ﻣﺮة ﻳﺘﻢ اﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ زر ‪ ENTER‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ اﻟﺼﻮرة‪ .‬وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪. X١-X٤-X٣-X٢-X١ :‬‬
‫ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻠﺷﺭﺍﺌﺢ‬‫ﺍﻀﻐﻁ ﻋﻟﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ (®) PLAY‬ﻠﺑﺩﺀ ﺍﻟﻭﻈﻳﻓﺔ ‪.SLIDE‬‬
‫ﺍﻀﻐﻁ ﻋﻟﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ (∏∏) PAUSE‬ﻹﻴﻗﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﻈﻳﻓﺔ ‪ .SLIDE‬ﺍﻀﻐﻁ ﻋﻟﻰ ﺰﺭ ‪) PLAY‬ﺘﺷﻐﻳﻝ( ﻠﻣﻭ ﺍﺼﻟﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻠﺷﺭﺍﺌﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ‬
‫ ﺤﺲ ﺏ ﺤﺟﻡ ﺍﻠﻣﻟﻑ‪ ،‬ﻘﺩ ﻴﻛﻭﻥ ﻤﻗﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻠﺯﻤﻥ ﺍﻠﻓﺎﺼﻝ ﺒﻳﻥ ﻜﻝ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺧﺗﻟﻓًﺎ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻠﺯﻤﻥ ﺍﻠﻓﺎﺼﻝ ﺍﻠﻣﺿﺑﻭﻃ‬‫ ﻘﺩ ﺘﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺒﺣﺟﻡ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﺤﺳﺏ ﺤﺟﻡ ﺍﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﻔﻲ ﺍﻠﻭﻀﻊ ‪HD-JPEG‬‬‫ ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ BD Wise‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) Off‬إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮر ‪ JPEG‬ﺑﺤﺠﻢ أﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪720‬‬‫‪ 480 x‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺘﺷﻐﻴﻝ ‪MP3-JPEG‬‬
‫ﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺘﺸﻐﻴﻝ ﻣﻟﻔﺎﺕ ‪ JPEG‬ﻤﻊ ﺍﺴﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻠﻤﻮﺴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻀﻐﻃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ †‪ π/‬ﻠﺗﺤﺩﻳﺩ ﻤﻟﻑ ‪ MP3‬ﻔﻲ ﻘﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﺍﻠﻤﻗﺎﻃﻊ ﺜﻡ ﺍﻀﻐﻃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮدة ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ زر رﺟﻮع ‪ RETURN‬أو اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪MENU‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻀﻐﻃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ ®‪ √/‬ﻠﺗﺤﺩﻳﺩ ﻤﻟﻑ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺻﻮر‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﻀﻐﻃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ †‪ π/‬ﻠﺗﺤﺩﻳﺩ ﻤﻟﻑ ‪ JPEG‬ﻔﻲ ﻘﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﺍﻠﻤﻗﺎﻃﻊ ﺜﻡ ﺍﻀﻐﻃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ ﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺘﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻠﻣﻭﺴﻳﻗﻰ ﻤﻦ ﺍﻠﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ‬‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ Stop‬ﻋﻧﺩﻤﺎ ﺘﺭﻴﺩ ﺇﻗﺎﻒ ﺍﻠﺘﺷﻐﻴﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ‬
‫ﻴﺟﺏ ﺃﻦ ﺘﻜﻭﻦ ﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﻭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻠﻗﺭﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻘﺭﺹ ‪ CD-R‬ﻨﻭ ﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺒﺎﻤﺘﺩﺍﺪ ‪JPEG‬‬
‫ ﻴﻛﻦ ﺘﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻠﻤﻟﻔﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻤﺘﺩﺍﺩ ”‪ “.jpg‬ﻭ ”‪ “.JPG‬ﻔﻘﻄ‪.‬‬‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻦ ﺍﻠﻗﺭﺹ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻐﻠﻕ‪ ،‬ﻔﺳﻴﺳﺘﻐﺭﻖ ﻭﻘﺗًﺎ ﺃﻄﻮﻝ ﻠﺑﺩﺀ ﺍﻠﺘﺷﻐﻴﻝ ﻮﻗﺩ ﻴﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺘﺷﻐﻴﻝ ﻜﺎﻔﺔ ﺍﻠﻣﻟﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﻤﺳﺠﻟﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻴﻤﻛﻦ ﺘﺸﻐﻴﻝ ﺃﻘﺭﺍﺹ ‪ CD-R‬ﺍﻠﺗﻲ ﺘﺸﺘﻤﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ JPEG‬ﺒﺘﻧﺳﻴﻖ ‪ ISO 9660‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Joliet‬ﻔﻗﻄ‪.‬‬‫ ﻻ ﻴﺠﻭﺯ ﺃﻦ ﻴﻛﻭﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻤﻟﻒ ‪ JPEG‬ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻤﻦ ‪ ٨‬ﺤﺭﻭﻒ ﻭﻴﺟﺏ ﺃﻻﻴﺷﺘﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺳﺎﻔﺎﺕ ﻔﺎﺭ ﻏﺔ ﺃﻮ ﺤﺭﻭﻑ ﺨﺎﺼﺔ )‪.(+ = / .‬‬‫ ﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺘﺸﻐﻳﻝ ﻘﺭﺹ ﺘﻤﺕ ﻜﺘﺎﺒﺘﻪﻋﻠﻰ ﺠﻠﺳﺎﺕ ﻤﺘﺗﺎﺒﻌﺔ ﻔﻗﻄ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺪﺘﻮﻯ ﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻠﺟﺳﻠﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﻤﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻑﻠﻰ ﻤﻗﻃﻊ ﻔﺎﺭﻍ‪ ،‬ﻔﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺘﺸﻐﻴﻝ ﺍﻠﻌﺭﺾ ﺤﺘﻰ ﺍﻠﻤﻗﻃﻊ ﺍﻠﻔﺎﺭﻍ ﻓﻘﻄ‪.‬‬‫ ﻴﻤﻛﻦ ﺘﺳﺠﻴﻝ ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻜﺣﺩ ﺃﻘﺼﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻘﺭﺹ ﻤﺿﻐﻮﻂ ﻮﺍﺤﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻴُﻨﺼﺢ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﺧﺩﺍﻢ ﺃﻘﺭﺍﺹ ‪.Kodak Picture CD‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺘﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻘﺭﺹ ‪ ، Kodak Picture CD‬ﻴﻤﻜﻬ ﺘﺸﻐﻴﻝ ﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ JPEG‬ﻔﻘﻄ ﻔﻲ ﻤﺟﻠﺩ ﺍﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫ ﻘﺭﺹ ‪ : Kodak Picture CD‬ﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺘﺷﻐﻴﻝ ﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ JPEG‬ﺍﻠﻤﻮﺟﻭﺪﺓ ﻔﻲ ﻤﺠﻠﺩ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺭ ﺒﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﻠﻗﺎﺌﻲ‪.‬‬‫ ﻘﺭﺾ ‪ : Konica Picture CD‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﻧﺕ ﺘﺭﻴﺩ ﻋﺭﺾ ﺍﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻔﺤﺪﺩ ﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ JPEG‬ﻔﻲ ﻘﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﺍﻠﻤﻔﺎﻂﻊ‬‫ ﻘﺭﺾ ‪ : Fuji Picture CD‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﻧﺕ ﺘﺭﻴﺩ ﻋﺭﺾ ﺍﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻔﺤﺪﺩ ﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ JPEG‬ﻔﻲ ﻘﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﺍﻠﻤﻔﺎﻂﻊ‬‫ ﻘﺭﺾ ‪ : QSS Picture CD‬ﻘﺩ ﻻ ﺘﺳﺗﻄﻴﻐ ﺍﻠﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺘﺸﻐﻴﻝ ﻘﺭﺹ ‪QSS Picture CD‬‬‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻦ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻠﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﻤﻭﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻔﻲ ﻘﺭﺹ ﻮﺍﺤﺩ ﻔﻗﻃ ﻴﺰﻴﺩ ﻋﻦ ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﻤﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﻔﻴﻣﻜﻦ ﺘﺸﻐﻳﻝ ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﻤﻠﻒ ﺒﺘﻧﺳﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﻔﻘﻃ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻦ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻠﻣﺠﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻠﻤﻭﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻔﻲ ﻘﺭﺹ ﻮﺍﺤﺩ ﻔﻗﻃ ﻴﺰﻴﺩ ﻋﻦ ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﻔﻴﻣﻜﻦ ﺘﺸﻐﻳﻝ ﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ JPEG‬ﻔﻘﻃ ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻈﺎﺌﻑ ﻜﺎﺭﻭﻜﻲ )‪(DVD-D530K/DVD-D360K‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻛﺎﺭﻮﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﺧﺮج اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮك ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن أو ﻣﻜﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ اﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮوﻓﻮ ‪) Mic‬اﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮوﻓﻮن( ن ﺑـ وﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ اﻟﻜﺎرﻳﻮﻛﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮوﻓﻮن وﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ اﻟﻜﺎرﻳﻮﻛﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻟﻜﺎرﻳﻮﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ اﻟﻜﺎرﻳﻮكي‪/‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت اﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮوﻓﻮن‪/‬اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح )اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ(‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮص اﻟﻜﺎرﻳﻮﻛﻲ اﻟﺬي ﻳﻀﻢ اﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‬
‫ ﺍﻀﻐﻄﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ ‪ (†) KARAOKE‬ﻟﺘﺣﺪﻴﺪ ﻤﻠﻒ اﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬‫‪ .٢‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر ﻳﻦ ®‪ √/‬ﻠﺗﺤﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻠﻌﻨﺼﺭ ﺍﻠﻣﻄﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ اﻟﻜﺎرﻳﻮﻛﻲ )اﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ(‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻛـ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .١‬اﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮوﻓﻮ‪ ،‬ن ﻣﺘﺼﻞ وﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ اﻟﻜﺎرﻳﻮﻛﻲ ﻗﻴﺪ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻓﺼﻞ‪/‬ﻋﻨﻮان ﻟﻘﺮص اﻟﻜﺎرﻳﻮﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ إذا ﻛﺎن ﻛﺎرﻳﻮﻛﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻳﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﻠﻰ أي ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺣﻮل ﻣﺤﺮك اﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ‪ ،VCD‬ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻜﺎرﻳﻮﻛﻲ اﻟﺼﻠﺐ أو اﻷﻓﻼم‪ ،‬وﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ دوﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪ .٣‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ اﻟﻜﺎرﻳﻮﻛﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎء وﻗﺖ ﻛﻞ ﻓﺼﻞ‪/‬ﻋﻨﻮان ﻟﻤﺪة ‪ 6‬ﺛﻮانٍ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺑر ﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺴﺠﻳﻞ اﻟﺼو ت ﺑﻄر ﻳﻘﺔ ﻛﺎر ﻳوﻛۑ )‪(KARAOKE‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺪﺨﻝ ﻮﺴﺎﺌﻁ ﺘﺧﺯﻴﻥ ‪ USB‬ﻔﻲ ﻤﻗﺑﺱ ‪ USB‬ﺜﻡ ﻮﺼﻝ ﻘﺎﺒﺱ ﺒﺎﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻮﻔﻮﻥ ﺒﺎﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻮﻔﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬ﻟﺑﺩﺀ ﺘﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺒﺭ ﻨﺎﻤﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻜﺎﺭﻴﻮﻜﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺨﺗﺭ ﺃﺤﺩ ﻤﻟﻓﺎﺕ ‪ ، VCD/DVD/SCVD‬ﺜﻡ ﺍﻀﻐﻁ ﺰﺭ ‪) RECORD‬ﺘﺳﺟﻳﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻴﺳﺗﻂﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺴﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻟﻰ ﺰﺭ ‪) STOP‬ﺇﻴﻗﺎﻑ( ﻮﺯﺭ ‪) PAUSE‬ﺇﻴﻗﺎﻑ ﻤﺅﻘﺕ( ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺒﻌﻣﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻠﻐﺎﺀ ‪ ،‬ﻔﺈﻨﻪ ﺴﻳﺗﻡ ﺤﻓﻁ ﻨﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﺍﻠﻣﻟﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ‬
‫ إذاﻛﻨﺖﺗﺴﻤﻊﺻﻮﺗًﺎ ﻣﻌﯿﻨًﺎ )ﺻﺮاخ أو ﻧﺒﺎح( ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﯿﺰﺓ ﻛﺎﺭﻭ ﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﻞ اﳌﻴﻜﺮوﻓﻮ ن ﺑﻌﯿﺪًا ﻋﻦ اﳌﻜﺒﺮات أو ﻗﻢ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت اﳌﻴﻜﺮوﻓﻮن‬‫أو ﻣﺴﺘﻮ ى ﺻﻮت ﳌﻜﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮ ص ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ MP3‬ﻭ‪ WMA‬ﻭ‪ ،LPCM‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰة ﻛﺎروﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺘﻭﺼﻳﻝ ‪ ،MIC‬ﻻ ﻴﻌﻤﻝ ﻃﺭﻒ ﺍﻠﺘﻭﺼﻴﻝ ‪.DIGITAL OUT‬‬‫ ﻳﺼﺪر ﺼﻭﺕ ‪ MIC‬ﺻﻮت ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﺧﺮ ج اﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ي ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬‫ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺎﻳﻜﺮوﻓﻮن ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ اﻟﻤﺎﻳﻜﺮوﻓﻮن )‪ (MIC‬اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮد ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻈﺎم اﻟﺼﻮت ‪ 5.1CH‬إﻟﻰ ﻧﻈﺎم اﻟﺼﻮت‬‫‪ 2CH‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬وﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ اﻟﻤﺎﻳﻜﺮوﻓﻮن‪.‬‬
‫ﺘﻐﻳﻳﻁ ‪Setup Menu‬‬
‫ﺍﺴﺘﺧﺩﺍﻢ ‪Setup Menu‬‬
‫ﺘﺘﻴﺢ ﻠﻚ ﺍﻠﻘﺎﺌﻤﺔ ‪ Setup‬ﺘﺧﺼﻴﺹ ﻤﺷﻐﻝ ‪ DVD‬ﻋﻦ ﻄﺭﻴﻖ ﺍﻠﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺒﺘﺣﻳﺪ ﺘﻔﺿﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻠﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻠﻤﺧﺘﻠﻔﺔﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻭﻯ ﺮ ﺌﻴﺴﻲ ‪،‬ﺑﻝ ﻭﻀﺑﻄ ﺍﻠﻤﺷﻐﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻭ ﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻠﺘﻠﻴﻔﺯ ﻴﻭﻦ ﺍﻠﻣﺘﻭ ﻔﺮﺓ ﻠﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺜﻧﺎﺀ ﻀﺒﻄ ﺍﻠﻮﺤﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ، Stop‬ﺍﻀﻌﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﺒﻭ ﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺴﺧﺪﻢ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ ®‪ √/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺪﺍﺕ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺴﺧﺪﻢ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ †‪ π/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ، Setup‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ® ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ †‪ π/‬ﻠﻠﻮﻝ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻣﻴﺯ ﺍﺕ ﺍﻠﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ® ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺯﺮ ‪ ENTER‬ﻠﻠﻭ ﺼﻭﻝ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻣﻳﺯ ﺍﺕ ﺍﻠﻔﺮ ﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻹﺨﻔﺎ ﺀ ﻋﺮ ﺾ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹ ﻋﺪﺍﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺠﺮ ﺍﺀ ﺍﻹ ﻋﺪﺍﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ RETURN‬ﻣﺮﺓً‪.‬‬
‫ﻀﺑﻄ ﺧﻳﺎﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻠﻌﺮﺾ‬
‫ﺘﺘﻴﺢ ﻠﻠﻚ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺕ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺪ ﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺕﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺪﺍﺕ ﺤﺎﻠﺔ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺕﺤﺴﺐ ﻨﻅﺎﻢ ﺍﻠﺼﻭ ﺕ ﺍﻠﻤﺴﺘﺧﺪﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺜﻧﺎﺀ ﻀﺒﻄ ﺍﻠﻮﺤﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ، Stop‬ﺍﻀﻌﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﺒﻭ ﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺴﺧﺪﻢ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ ®‪ √/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺪﺍﺕ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻀﺒﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ †‪ π/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺭﺾ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ® ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻀﺒﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ †‪ π/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻠﻣﺼﺮ ﺍﻠﻤﻄﻠﻮﺐ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ® ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻭﻈﻳﻓﺔ ‪(DVD-D530K/DVD-D530) BD-Wise‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮن اﻟﻤﺸﻐّﻞ ﻣﺘﺼﻼً ﺑﺄﺣﺪ أﺟﻬﺰة ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮن ‪ SAMSUNG‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ و ﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ ، BD Wise‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺠﻮدة ﺻﻮرة ﻣﺤﺴّﻨﺔ وذﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻼل ﺿﺒﻂ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ BD Wise‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺜﻧﺎﺀ ﻀﺒﻄ ﺍﻠﻮﺤﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ، Stop‬ﺍﻀﻌﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﺒﻭ ﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺴﺧﺪﻢ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ ®‪ √/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺪﺍﺕ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻀﺒﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ †‪ π/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺭﺾ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ® ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻀﺒﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ †‪ π/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ، BD-Wise‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ® ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﻀﺒﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ †‪ π/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ ﺘﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻴﻗﺎﻑ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‬
‫ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ‬
‫ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ هﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر إﻻ إذا ﻜﻟن اﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻳﺪﻋﻢ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪BD Wise‬‬‫ ﺍﺮﺠﻊ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺪﻠﻳﻝ ﻤﺴﺘﺧﺪﻢ ﺍﻠﺘﻠﻴﻔﺯﻴﻭﻦ ﻠﻠﺘﻌﺮ ﻒ ﻋﻰ ﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻦ ﺍﻠﺘﻠﻴﻔﺯ ﻴﻭﻦ ﻴﺪ ﻋﻢ ﺍﻠﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻠﻣﺘﻘﺪﻢ ﺃﻢ ﻻ ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻦ ﺍﻠﺘﻠﻴﻔﺯ ﻴﻭﻦ ﻴﺪ ﻋﻢ ﺍﻻﺴﺘﻌﺮ ﺍﺾ ﺍﻠﻣﺘﻗﺪﻢ‪،‬‬‫ﻔﺎﺘﺑﻊ ﺍﻠﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﻭﺍﺭﺪﺓ ﻔﻲ ﺪﻠﻴﻝ ﻤﺴﺘﺠﺪﻢ ﺍﻠﺘﻠﻴﻔﺯ ﻴﻭﻦ ﻔﻤﺎ ﻴﺘﻠﻖﻴﺎﻋﺪﺍﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺴﺘﻌﺭ ﺍﺾ ﺍﻠﻣﺘﻗﺪﻢ ﻔﻲ ﻘﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﻨﻅﺎﻢ ﺍﻠﺘﻠﻴﻔﺯﻴﻮﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻔﻲ ﺤﺎﻠﺔ ﻀﺑﻃ ‪ Video Output‬ﺑﻃﺮﻴﻘﺔ ﻏﻳﺮ ﺼﺣﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺘﻆﻬﺭ ﺍﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺘﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺩﺭﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﺩﻘﺔ ﺍﻠﻣﺗﻭﻔﺭﺓ ﻠﺧﺭﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺗﻠﻳﻔﺯﻴﻭﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺁﻠﺔ ﺍﻠﻌﺭﺾ ﺍﻠﻤﺳﺘﺧﺩﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻼﻄﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻯ ﺍﻠﺘﻔﺎﺼﻳﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻴﺭﺠﻰ ﺍﻠﺭﺠﻭﻉ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺩﻠﻴﻝ ﺍﻠﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻢ‬‫ﺍﻠﺧﺎﺹ ﺒﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻠﺗﻠﻳﻔﺰﻴﻭﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺁﻠﺔ ﺍﻠﻌﺭﺾ ﻠﺩﻴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻋﻧﺪ ﺘﻐﻴﻴﺭ ﻤﺳﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻠﺪﻘﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎﺀ ﺍﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻝ‪ ،‬ﻘﺪ ﻴﺘﻄﻠﺏ ﺍﻷﻤﺭ ﺜﻭﺍﻦ ﻘﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﻠﻅﻬﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻠﻌﻼﻴﺔ‬‫ ﻔﻲ ﺤﺎﻠﺔ ﻀﺑﻄﺩﻗﺔ ﺨﺭﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 720p‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 1080i ، 1080p‬ﻴﻭﻔﺭ ﺨﺭﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺠﻭﺩﺓ ﺃﻔﺿﻝ ﻠﻟﺼﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ BD Wise‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) Off‬إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮر ‪ JPEG‬ﺑﺤﺠﻢ أﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 480 x 720‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﻀﺑﻄ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺘﺘﻴﺢ ﻠﻠﻚ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺕ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺪ ﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺕﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺪﺍﺕ ﺤﺎﻠﺔ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺕ ﺤﺴﺐ ﻨﻅﺎﻢ ﺍﻠﺼﻭ ﺕ ﺍﻠﻤﺴﺘﺧﺪﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺜﻧﺎﺀ ﻀﺒﻄ ﺍﻠﻮﺤﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ، Stop‬ﺍﻀﻌﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﺒﻭ ﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺴﺧﺪﻢ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ ®‪ √/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺪﺍﺕ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻀﺒﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ †‪ π/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻠﺼﻮﺕ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ® ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻀﺒﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ †‪ π/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻠﻣﺼﺮ ﺍﻠﻤﻄﻠﻮﺐ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ® ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ‬
‫ ﻋﻧﺪ ﺘﺸﻐﻴﻝ ﻗﺮ ﺹ ﻳﺷﺘﻤﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺼﻭﺕ ‪ MPEG‬ﻓﻲ ﺘﺣﺪﻴﺪ ‪، bitsream‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻴﺜﺘﻤﻝ ﺍﻡﻤﺣﻭﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺼﻭﺕﻭﻫﻭ ﻳﺴﺘﻨﺩﺇﻠﻰﻣﺴﺘﻘﺑﻝ ﺍﻠﺼﻭﺕ‬‫ ﻻ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﺨﺭﺝ ﺼﻭﺕﺘﻧﺎﻅﺭﻱ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺘﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻘﺭﺹ ﺼﻭﺕ ‪.‬‬‫ ﺤﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻧﺎ ﺀ ﻀﺒﻄ ‪ PCM Down Sampling‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.off‬‬‫• ﺴﺘﻗﻭﻢ ﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻗﺮ ﺍﺺ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻠﺼﻭ ﺖ ﺬﻱ ﺍﻠﻣﻌﺎﻴﻧﺔ ﺍﻠﻤﻨﺧﻓﺿﺔ ﻓﻘﻄ ﻣﻦﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﺧﺭ ﺝ ﺍﻠﺮ ﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪(DVD-D530K/DVD-D530) HDMI‬‬
‫ ﺫﺍ ﻠﻢ ﻴﻜﻦ ﺍﻠﺘﻠﻴﻔﺯ ﻳﻭﻦ ﺍﻠﻤﺘﻭ ﻓﺭ ﻠﺪﻴﻙ ﻤﺘﻭ ﺍﻔﻘًﺎ ﻤﻊ ﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﺿﻐﻃ ﻤﺘﻌﺪﺪﺓ ﺍﻠﻘﻭ ﺍﺕ )ﺪﻭ ﻠﺒﻲ ﺭ ﻗﻤﻲ ﺃﻭ ‪ ،(MPEG‬ﻔﻴﺠﺐ ﻀﺒﻄ ‪Digital Audio‬‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.PCM‬‬
‫ ﺇﺫﺍﻠﻢ ﻴﻜﻦ ﺍﻠﺘﻠﻴﻔﺯ ﻴﻭﻦ ﺍﻠﻤﺘﻭ ﻔﺭ ﻠﺪﻳﻙ ﻤﺘﻭ ﺍﻓﻘًﺎ ﻤﻊ ﻣﻌﺪ ﻻﺕ ﺍﻠﻌﻴﺬﺔ ‪ LPCM‬ﺍﻠﺘﻲ ﺘﺘﺟﺎﻭﺯ ‪ ٤٨‬ﻛﻴﻠﻭ ﻫﺮ ﺘﺯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺟﺐ ﻀﺑﻄ ‪PCM Down sampling‬‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.On‬‬
‫ﺘﻢ ﺍﻠﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺑﻤﻭ ﺟﺐ ﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺹ ﻣﻦ ‪ "Dolby" .Dolby Laboratories‬ﻭﺭﻤﺯ ﺣﺮ ﻒ ‪ D‬ﺍﻠﻣﺯ ﻭﺪ ﺝ ﻳﻤﺛﻼﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻠ ‪.Dolby Laboratories‬‬
‫ﻀﺑﻄ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺖ ﺍﻠﻨﻅﺎﻢ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺜﻧﺎﺀ ﻀﺒﻄ ﺍﻠﻮﺤﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ، Stop‬ﺍﻀﻌﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﺒﻭ ﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺴﺧﺪﻢ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ ®‪ √/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺪﺍﺕ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻀﺒﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ †‪ π/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ ﻨﻅﺎﻢ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ® ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻀﺒﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ †‪ π/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻠﻣﺼﺮ ﺍﻠﻤﻄﻠﻮﺐ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ® ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﻴﻔﺔ )‪(DVD-D530K/DVD-D530) Anynet+(HDMI-CEC‬‬
‫ﻴﻣﻜﻦ ﺍﺴﺘﺧﺪﺍﻢﻭ ﻆﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Anynet+‬ﻠﺘﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻠﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺴﺘﺧﺪﺍﻢﻭﺤﺪﺓﺍﻠﺘﺣﻛﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻠﺠﺎﺼﺔ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯﺴﺎﻤﺴﻮ ﻨﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺫﻠﻚ ﺑﺘﻭ ﺼﻳﻝ ‪ DVD-D530K/D530‬ﺇﻠﻰ ﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺴﺎﻤﺴﻭ‬
‫ﻨﺞﺒﺎﺴﺘﺧﺪﺍﻢﻜﺍﺑﻝ ‪) .HDMI‬ﻭﻳﺘﻭ ﻔﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻓﻗﻄ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺠﻬﺯﺓ ﺘﺎﻔﺎﺯ ﺴﺎﻤﺴﻭﻨﺞ ﺍﻠﺘﻲ ﺘﺪ ﻋﻢ ﻭ ﻅﻴﻔﺔ ‪(.Anynet+‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺪ "ﺘﺷﻐﻳﻝ "ﻋﻨﺪ ﺘﻭ ﺼﻴﻝ ‪ DVD-D530K/D530‬ﺑﺎﺴﺘﺧﺪﺍﻢ ﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺴﺎﻤﺴﻭ ﻨﺞ ﻴﺪ ﻋﻢ ﻭ ﻅﻴﻔﺔ ‪.Anynet+‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺜﻧﺎﺀ ﻀﺒﻄ ﺍﻠﻮﺤﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ، Stop‬ﺍﻀﻌﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﺒﻭ ﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺴﺧﺪﻢ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ ®‪ √/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺪﺍﺕ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻀﺒﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ †‪ π/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ ﻨﻅﺎﻢ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ® ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻀﺒﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ †‪ π/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ )‪ ، Anynet+(HDMI-CEC‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ® ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺣﺪﺪ )‪ Anynet+(HDMI-CEC‬ﻋﻠﻰ "ﺘﺷﻐﻴﻝ" ﺑﻤﺸﻐﻝ ‪ ،DVD‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﻀﺒﻃﻭﻅﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Anynet+‬ﻔﻲ ﺍﻠﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪).‬ﺭ ﺍﺠﻊ ﺪﻠﻴﻝ ﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺖ ﺍﻠﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻠﻣﺯ ﻴﺪ ﻤﻦ ﺍﻠﻣﻠﻭ ﻤﺎﺖ‪(.‬‬
‫‬
‫ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ‬
‫ ﺒﺎﻠﺿﻐﻃ ﻋﻠﻰﺯﺭ ‪) Play‬ﺘﺷﻐﻳﻝ( ﺒﺎﻠﻭﺤﺩﺓ ﺃﺜﻧﺎﺀ ﻤﺷﺎﻫﺩﺓ ﺍﻠﺘﻠﻔﺎﺰ ‪ ،‬ﺴﻳﺗﻢ ﺘﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺸﺎﺸﺔ ﺍﻠﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺸﺎﺸﺔ ﺍﻠﺘﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫ ﻔﻲ ﺤﺎﻠﺔ ﺘﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﺜﻧﺎﺀ ﺇﻴﻘﺎﻑ ﻄﺎﻘﺔ ﺍﻠﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪ ،‬ﻴﺗﻢ ﺘﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻄﺎﻘﺔ ﺍﻠﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻴﻗﺎﻒ ﺘﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻠﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪ ،‬ﻴﺗﻡ ﺇﻴﻘﺎﻒ ﻤﺷﻐﻝ ‪ DVD‬ﺘﻟﻗﺎﺌﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ ﻔﻲ ﺤﺎﻠﺔ ﺘﻐﻴﻳﺭ ‪ HDMI‬ﺇﻠﻰ ﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ )ﺍﻠﻤﺭﻜﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﻤﻜﻭﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻤﺎ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺫﻠﻚ( ﻔﻲ ﺍﻠﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﺜﻧﺎﺀ ﺘﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻘﺭﺹ ‪ ، DVD‬ﻴﺗﻭﻘﻒ ﻤﺷﻐﻝ ‪، DVD‬‬‫ﻠﻜﻦ ﻴﺳﻣﺭ ﺘﺷﻐﻴﻝ ﻘﺭﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻔﻲ ﻤﺷﻐﻝ ‪ DVD‬ﺤﺳﺏ ﺍﻠﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻠﺫﻱ ﻴﺩﻋﻤﻪ ﻘﺭﺹ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻄ ﻤﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻠﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺬﺍ ﺘﻢ ﺿﺑﻄ ﻗﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﺍﻠﻤﺷﻐﻝﻭ ﻗﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺺﻭﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻠﺼﻮ ﺕ ﻭ ﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻠﺘﺭ ﺠﻤﺔ ﺍﻠﻣﺼﺎ ﺣﺒﺔ ﺒﺷﻜﻝ ﻤﺴﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺘﻆﻬﺭ ﺠﻣﻴﻌًﺎ ﺑﺷﻜﻝ ﺘﻠﻗﺎﺌﻲ ﻔﻲ ﻜﻝ ﻤﺮ ﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺮ ﺽ ﻔﻴﺎﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺜﻧﺎﺀ ﻀﺒﻄ ﺍﻠﻮﺤﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ، Stop‬ﺍﻀﻌﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﺒﻭ ﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺴﺧﺪﻢ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ ®‪ √/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺪﺍﺕ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻀﺒﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ †‪ π/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻠﻠﻐﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ® ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻀﺒﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ †‪ π/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻠﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻠﻣﻄﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ® ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ‬
‫ ﻴﺘﻢ ﺘﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻠﻠﻐﺔ ﻭ ﺘﻌﻭ ﺪ ﺍﻠﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺌﻣﺔ ‪.Language Setup‬‬‫ ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﻋﺭﺾﻗﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.Menu‬‬‫ ﺇﺬﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻠﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻠﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺳﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻗﺭﺹ ﻔﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺘﺤﺩﻴﺩ ﺍﻠﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻷﺼﻠﻴﺔ ﻤﺳﺑﻗﺔ ﺍﻠﺘﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫ ﺤﺪﺪ "‪ "Original‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﻨﺖ ﺘﺭﻴﺪ ﻀﺑﻂ ﺍﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮ ﺍﻀﻴﺔ ﻠﻣﺎﺪﺓ ﺍﻠﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺣﻴﺚ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻠﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻷ ﺼﺎﻴﺔ ﻠﺘﺴﺟﻴﻝ ﺍﻠﻗﺭ ﺹ‪.‬‬‫ ﺤﺪﺪ "‪ "Automatic‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﻨﺖ ﺘﺭﻴﺪ ﻀﺑﻂ ﺍﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻠﻣﺼﺎﺣﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻨﻔﺲ‬‫‪ -‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺘﺷﻤﻝ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻗﺭ ﺍﺺ ﺍﻠﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻠﺘﻲ ﺘﻢ ﺘﺣﺪ ﻳﺪ ﻫﺎ ﻜﻠﻐﺔ ﺃﻭﻠﻰ ‪،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻠﺤﺎﻠﺔ ﻳﺴﺘﺧﺪﻢ ﺍﻠﻗﺭﺹ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺪ ﺍﻠﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻷﺼﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻀﺑﻄ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺖ اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺘﻤﻝ ﻭﻆﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Parental Control‬ﺒﺎﻻﺷﺘﺮ ﺍﻚ ﻤﻊ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺺ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻠﺙﻲ ﺘﻢﺘﻌﻳﻳﻦ ﺘﺼﻨﻳﻒ ﻠﻬﺎ ﺒﺤﻳﺚ ﺘﺴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻔﻲ ﺃﻗﺮ ﺍﺺ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻠﺘﻲ ﺘﺷﺎ‬
‫ﻫﺪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻷ ﺴﺭ ﺓ‪ .‬ﻴﻭ ﺠﺪ ﻣﺎ ﻴﺼﻝ ﺇﻠﻰ ‪ ٨‬ﻣﺴﺘﻭ ﻴﺎﺕ ﺘﺼﻨﻳﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻘﺮ ﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻭﻯ ﺍﻠﺘﺼﻨﻳﻑ ﻭ ﺘﻐﻳﻴﺭ ﻜﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻠﻣﺭﻭﺭ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺜﻧﺎﺀ ﻀﺒﻄ ﺍﻠﻮﺤﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ، Stop‬ﺍﻀﻌﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﺒﻭ ﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺴﺧﺪﻢ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ ®‪ √/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺪﺍﺕ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻀﺒﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ †‪ π/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﻤﺎﻦ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ® ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ .ENTER‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻜﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻠﻣﺭﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻀﺒﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ †‪ π/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻠﻮﺍﻠﺪﻴﻦ‪/‬ﺘﻐﻴﻳﺭ ﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻠﻤﺭﻮﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ® ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﻀﻐﻃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ†‪ π/‬ﻠﺘﺤﺪﻴﺪ ‪ Rating Level‬ﺍﻠﻣﻃﻠﻭﺐ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻤﺛﺎﻝ( ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺪ ﻔﻲ ﺍﻠﻭﻀﻊ ﺃﻤﻥﺍﻟﻃﻔﻞ‬
‫ ﻔﻣﺛﻼً ﺇﺫﺍﺘﻢ ﺘﺤﺩﻴﺩ ﺤﺗﻰ ﺃﻤﻥﺍﻟﻃﻔﻞ ‪ ،‬ﻔﻠﻦ ﻴﺗﻢ ﺘﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻘﺭﺍﺹ ﺍﻠﺗﻲ ﺘﺷﺘﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮى ‪ 2‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪ .٥‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻜﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻠﻣﺭﻭﺭ‪ .‬إذا آﺎﻧﺖ هﺬﻩ هﻲ اﻟﻤﺮة اﻷوﻟﻰ‪ ،‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ .0000‬ﺛﻢ أدﺧﻞ آﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﺮور اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪة‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻜﻮن آﻠﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﺮور ﻋﺪدا ﻏﻴﺮ ‪0000‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ اﻷﺑﻮي‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺇﺪﺨﺎﻝ ﻜﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻠﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺍﻠﺠﺪﻴﺪﺓ ﻤﺠﺪﺌﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺃﻤﻥﺍﻟﻃﻔﻞ‬‫ ‪) G‬ﺍﻠﺠﻤﻬﻮﺮ ﺍﻠﻌﺎﻢ(‪ :‬ﺠﻣﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﺮ ﺍﻠﻤﺳﻣﻭﺡﻠﻬﺎ‬‫ ‪) PG‬ﺍﻠﺘﻭ ﺠﻴﻪ ﺍﻷ ﺒﻭ ﻱ ﺍﻠﻤﻘﺘﺮﺡ(‪ :‬ﺍﻠﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﻭﺟﻭﺪ ﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻠﻣﻭ ﺍﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻠﻣﻼﺌﻤﺔ ﻠﻸﻄﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬‫ ‪) 13-PG‬ﺘﺣﺬﻴﺮ ﺍﻵ ﺒﺎ ﺀ ﺒﺸﺪﺓ(‪ :‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻠﻤﺣﺘﻤﻝ ﻭﺠﻭﺪ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻠﻣﻭ ﺍﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻠﻤﻼﺌﻣﺔ ﻠﻸ ﻄﻔﺎﻝ ﺘﺣﺕ ﺴﻥ ‪.13‬‬‫ ‪) PGR‬ﺍﻠﺘﻭ ﺠﻴﻪ ﺍﻷﺑﻮ ﻱ ﺍﻠﻤﻘﺘﺮ ﺡ(‪ :‬ﻠﻴﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻠﺿﺮﻭﺮ ﺓ ﻋﺪﻢ ﻤﻼﺀﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﻠﻸﻃﻔﺎﻝﻭﻡﻛ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻠﻭ ﺍﺟﺐ ﺘﺣﻔُﻅ ﺍﻠﻤﺸﺎ ﻫﺪﻭﻤﺮ ﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻵﺑﺎﺀﻭﺍﻷﻮﺼﻴﺎﺀ ﻠﻠﻤﺷﺎﻫﺪﻴﻦ‬‫ﺍﻠﺼﻐﺎﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪) R‬ﻤﺣﻆﻭﺮ( ‪ :‬ﻤﻦ ﺍﻠﻤﻔﺘﺮ ﺾ ﻭﺟﻭﺪ ﺼﺤﺑﺔ ﻠﻠﻤﺷﺎﻫﺪﻴﻦ ﺘﺣﺕ ﺴﻦ ‪17‬‬‫ )‪ : NC 17 (NC 17‬ﻻ ﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻠﺳﻣﺎ ﺡ ﻷﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻦ ‪ 17‬ﻓﺄﻗﻝ‬‫‪ -‬ﺒﺎﻠﻎ‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‬
‫ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ‬
‫‪ -‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻨﺴﻴﺕ ﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻠﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻠﺨﺎﺼﺔ ﺑﻚ ‪ ،‬ﻔﺎﻨﻆﺮ"ﻨﺴﻴﺎﻦ ﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻠﻣﺮﻭﺭ" ﻓﻲ ﺪﻠﻴﻝ ﺍﺴﺘﻜﺸﺎﻒ ﺍﻷﺨﻃﺎﺀ ﻭﺇﺼﻼﺤﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻀﺑﻄ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺖ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺜﻧﺎﺀ ﻀﺒﻄ ﺍﻠﻮﺤﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ، Stop‬ﺍﻀﻌﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﺒﻭ ﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺴﺧﺪﻢ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ ®‪ √/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺪﺍﺕ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻀﺒﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ †‪ π/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺎﻢ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ® ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻀﺒﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ †‪ π/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻠﻣﺼﺮ ﺍﻠﻤﻄﻠﻮﺐ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ® ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻀﺑﻄ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺖ ﺍﻠﺩﻋﻢ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺧﻴﺎر اﻟﺪﻋﻢ )‪ (Support‬اﻟﺘﻌﺮف ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻣﺸﻐﻞ اﻟﺪي ﻓﻲ دي )‪ (DVD‬ﻣﺜﻞ رﻣﺰ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﻧﺴﺨﺔ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬اﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﻟﻤﺴﻠﺴﻞ ورﻗﻢ اﻹﺻﺪار‬
‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻻﻃﻼع ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻠﻰ ﻇﻬﺮ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ اﻟﺪي ﻓﻲ دي )‪.(DVD‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺜﻧﺎﺀ ﻀﺒﻄ ﺍﻠﻮﺤﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ، Stop‬ﺍﻀﻌﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﺒﻭ ﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺴﺧﺪﻢ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ ®‪ √/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺪﺍﺕ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻀﺒﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭﻴﻦ †‪ π/‬ﻠﺘﺣﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻠﺪﻋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ® ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺣﺪﺪ ﻤﻌﻠﻮﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﻤﻧﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ® ﺃﻭ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﻠﻣﺭﺠﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻠﻤﻭﺍﺼﻓﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺴﺘﻜﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺨﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺇﺼﻼﺤﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻤﺘﻃﺎﺑﺎﺖ ﺍﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻠﻜﻬﺭ ﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻘﺒﻝ ﻄﺎﺏ ﺍﻠﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ )ﺍﺴﺗﻛﺷﺎﻒ ﺍﻷﺨﻅﺎ ﺀ ﻭﺇﺼﻼﺤﻬﺎ( ‪ ،‬ﻴﺭﺠﻰ ﺍﻠﺭﺠﻭﻉ ﺇﻠﻰ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻠﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻠﺸﺎﺸﺔ ﻻ ﺘﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍﺀ‬
‫‬
‫▪ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ||® )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻟﻭﺤﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ( ﻠﻣﺩﺓ ﺃﻜﺛﺭ ﻤﻦ‪ ٥‬ﺛﻭﺍٍﻦ ﺃﺜﻧﺎﺀ ﻋﺩﻢ ﻭﺠﻭﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻗﺭﺹ‬
‫ﺒﺎﻠﺩﺍﺧﻝ‪ .‬ﺴﺘﻌﻭﺩ ﻜﺈﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻠﻣﺼﻨﻊ ﻤﺭﺓﹰ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻤﺔ‬
‫▪ ﺍﻀﻐﻄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺯﺭ ||® )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﻟﻭﺤﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ( ﻠﻣﺩﺓ ﺃﻜﺛﺭ ﻤﻦ‪ ٥‬ﺛﻭﺍٍﻦ ﺃﺜﻧﺎﺀ ﻋﺩﻢ ﻭﺠﻭﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻗﺭﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺒﺎﻠﺩﺍﺧﻝ‪ .‬ﺴﺘﻌﻭﺩ ﻜﺈﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻠﻰ ﻘﻳﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻠﻣﺼﻨﻊ ﺒﻣﺎ ﻔﻲ ﺫﻟﹰﻚ ﻜﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻠﻣﺭﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻻﺘﻟﺠﺄ ﺇﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺴﺗﺧﺩﺎﻡ ﺫﻠﻙ ﺍﻹ ﻔﻲ ﺤﺎﻠﺔ ﺍﻠﺿﺭﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻠﻘﺼﻭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻴﻣﻛﻦ ﺘﺬﻜﺭ ﻜﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻠﻣﺭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻻ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﺨﺭﺝ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺍﺴﺘﻬﻼﻚ ﺍﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻠﻜﻬﺭ ﺑﻲ‬
‫‬
‫ﺍﻫﺘﺯﺍﺯ ﺨﺭﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺘﺒﺩﻮ ‬
‫▪ ﻔﻲ ﺤﺈﻠﺔ ﻈﻬﻭﺭ ﺘﺷﻭﻴﺶ ﺃﺒﻴﺾ ﻠﻟﻭﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺸﺎﺸﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻔﻬﺫﺍ ﻴﻌﻧﻲ ﺃﻦ ﺍﻠﺗﻠﻳﻔﺯﻴﻭﻦ ﻻ ﻴﺩﻋﻢ ‪HDCP‬‬
‫)ﺤﻣﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻠﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﺎﻠﻲ ﺍﻠﻨﻄﺎﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺨﺭﺝ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫▪ ﺘﺄﻜﺩ ﺃﻦ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻨﻅﺎﻢ ﺍﻠﺘﻠﻳﻔﺯﻴﻭﻦ ﻴﻌﻤﻝ ﺒﻄﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﺼﺤﻳﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫▪ ﻘﺩﺘﻬﺘﺯ ﺍﻠﺷﺎﺸﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﺘﺤﻭﻴﻝ ﻤﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻹﻄﺎﺭ ﻤﻦ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻫﺭﺘﺯ ﺇﻠﻰ ‪ ٦٠‬ﻫﺭﺘﺯ ﺒﺎﻠﺳﺒﺔ ﻠﺧﺭﺝ ‪) HDMI‬ﻭﺠﻬﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻠﻭﺴﺎﺌﻄ ﺍﻠﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻠﻭﻀﻭﺡ( ﺍﻠﺘﻲ ﺘﻌﻣﻝ ﺒﻤﺳﺘﻭﻯ ﺩﻘﺔ ‪.720p/1080i/1080p‬‬
‫▪ ﻴﺭﺠﻰ ﻤﺭﺍﺠﻌﺔ ﺩﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻠﻤﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣ ﺍﻠﺧﺎﺹ ﺒﺎﻠﺗﻠﻳﻔﺯﻴﻭﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻠﻭﺯﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺪ‬
‫‪ ٣٦٠‬ﻤﻠﻢ )ﻋﺭﺾ( ‪ ٢٠٧ X‬ﻤﻠﻢ )ﻋﻤﻖ( ‪ ٤٢ X‬ﻤﻠﻢ )ﺍﺭﺘﻓﺎﻉ(‬
‫ﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺭﻄﻭ ﺑﺔ ﺍﻠﺘﺛﻐﻴﻝ‬
‫ﺨﺮ ﺝ ﺍﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻭ‬
‫‪ +5°C‬ﺇﻠﻰ ‪+35°C‬‬
‫‪٪١٠‬‬
‫ﺇﻠﻰ ‪٪٧٥‬‬
‫ﻔﻴﺪﻴﻮ ﻤﺭﻜﺏ‬
‫ﻘﻧﺎﺓ ‪) 1.0 Vp-p : ١‬ﺤﻤﻞ‪ ٧٥‬ﺃﻭﻢ(‬
‫ﻤﻜﻮ ﻦ ﺍﻠﻔﻴﺪ ﻴﻭ‬
‫‪) Y : 1.0 Vp-p‬ﺤﻤﻞ‪ ٧٥‬ﺃﻭﻢ(‬
‫‪) Pr : 0.70 Vp-p‬ﺤﻤﻞ‪ ٧٥‬ﺃﻭﻢ(‬
‫‪) Pb : 0.70 Vp-p‬ﺤﻤﻞ‪ ٧٥‬ﺃﻭﻢ(‬
‫)‪HDMI (DVD-D530K/DVD-D530‬‬
‫ﻃﺮف اﻹﺧﺮاج‬
‫ﺠﺭ ﺝ ﺍﻠﺼﻭ ﺕ‬
‫ﻠﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﻮاﺻﻔﺎت ﻣﺰود اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ وﻣﻌﺪﻻت اﺳﺘﻬﻼﻜﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ا ﻟﺮﺟﺎء اﻟﺮﺟﻮع إﻠﻰ اﻟﻠﺼﻖ اﻟﻮﺟﻮد ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫‪ ١,٢‬ﻜﺨﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻖ ﺪﺮ ﺠﺔ ﺣﺭ ﺍﺭ ﺓ ﺍﻠﺘﺛﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫▪ ﺘﺄﻜﺩ ﻤﻦ ﺃﻦ ﺨﺭﺝ ﺍﻠﻔﻴﺩﻴﻭ ﻴﻌﻣﻝ ﺒﺩﻋﻢ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫▪ ﺇﻔﺤﺹ ﺍﻠﻭﺼﻟﺔ ﺒﻳﻦﺍﻠﺗﻠﻴﻔﺯﻴﻮﻦ ﻮﻤﻘﺒﺱ ‪ HDMI‬ﺒﻣﺷﻐﻝ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫▪ ﺘﺄﻜﺩ ﺃﻦ ﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻠﺘﻠﻳﻔﺯﻴﻭﻦ ﻴﺩﻋﻢ ﻤﺷﻌﻝ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻠﺬﻱ ﻴﻌﻣﻝ ﺒﺩﻋﻢ ‪.480p/720p/1080i/1080p‬‬
‫‪١١٠‬ـ‪ ٢٤٠‬ﻔﻭ ﻠﺕ ﻤﻦ ﺍﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻠﻤﺘﺮﺪﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺒﺘﺭﺪﺪ ‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺭ ﺗﺯ‬
‫ﺃﻘﺼﻰ ﻤﺴﺘﻭ ﻯ ﻠﻺ ﺠﺭ ﺍﺝ‬
‫ﺧﺮ ﺝ ﺼﻭ ﺕ ﺮ ﻗﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺴﺘﺠﺎ ﺑﺔ ﺍﻠﺘﺪﺪ‬
‫‪480p/576p. 720p. 1080i. 1080p‬‬
‫‪RCA‬‬
‫‪Vrms ٢‬‬
‫‪ ٢٠‬ﻫﺭﺘﺯ ﺇﻠﻰ‪ ٢٠‬ﻜﺘﻠﻭ ﻫﺭﺘﺯ‬
‫ﻄﺮ ﻒ ﺛﻨﺎﺌﻲ ﺍﻠﻤﺤﻭﺭ )‪(S/PDIF‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺫﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺫﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻧﺤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ‬SAMSUNG ‫ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬
.SAMSUNG ‫ ﻓﻴﺠﺮﻯ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﲟﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺀ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬،Samsung ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‬
Web Site
www.samsung.com/ca
www.samsung.com/mx
www.samsung.com/us
www.samsung.com/ar
www.samsung.com/br
www.samsung.com/cl
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com.co
www.samsung.com/be (Dutch)
www.samsung.com/be_fr (French)
www.samsung.com/cz
www.samsung.com/dk
www.samsung.com/fi
www.samsung.com/fr
www.samsung.de
www.samsung.com/hu
www.samsung.com/it
www.samsung.com/lu
www.samsung.com/nl
www.samsung.com/no
www.samsung.com/pl
www.samsung.com/pt
www.samsung.com/sk
www.samsung.com/es
www.samsung.com/se
www.samsung.com/uk
www.samsung.com/ie
www.samsung.com/at
www.samsung.com/ch
www.samsung.com/ch_fr/ (French)
www.samsung.ru
www.samsung.com/kz_ru
www.samsung.com/kz_ru
www.samsung.ua
www.samsung.com/ua_ru
www.samsung.com/lt
www.samsung.com/lv
www.samsung.com/ee
www.samsung.com/au
www.samsung.com/nz
www.samsung.com/cn
www.samsung.com/hk
www.samsung.com/hk_en/
www.samsung.com/in
www.samsung.com/id
www.samsung.com/jp
www.samsung.com/my
www.samsung.com/ph
www.samsung.com/sg
www.samsung.com/th
www.samsung.com/tw
www.samsung.com/vn
www.samsung.com/tr
www.samsung.com/za
www.samsung.com/ae
Contact Center 
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
01-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
0800-333-3733
0800-124-421, 4004-0000
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
00-1800-5077267
800-7919267
0-800-507-7267
1-800-10-7267
800-6225
1-800-299-0013
1-800-234-7267
800-7267
1-800-682-3180
1-800-751-2676
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
0-800-100-5303
01-8000112112
Area
Canada
Mexico
U.S.A
Argentine
Brazil
Chile
Nicaragua
Honduras
Costa Rica
Ecuador
El Salvador
Guatemala
Jamaica
Panama
Puerto Rico
Rep. Dominica
Trinidad & Tobago
Venezuela
Colombia
02 201 2418
Belgium
800-SAMSUNG (800-726786)
8-SAMSUNG (7267864)
30-6227 515
01 4863 0000
01805-SAMSUNG (726-7864 € 0,14/Min)
06-80-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
02 261 03 710
0900-SAMSUNG (0900-7267864) (€ 0,10/Min)
3-SAMSUNG (7267864)
0 801 1SAMSUNG (172678), 022-607-93-33
80820-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
0800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
902-1-SAMSUNG (902 172 678)
0771 726 7864 (SAMSUNG)
0845 SAMSUNG (7267864)
0818 717 100
0810-SAMSUNG (7267864, € 0.07/min)
Czech Republic
Denmark
Finland
France
Germany
Hungary
Italia
Luxemburg
Netherlands
Norway
Poland
Portugal
Slovakia
Spain
Sweden
U.K
Eire
Austria
0848-SAMSUNG (7267864, CHF 0.08/min)
Switzerland
8-800-555-55-55
8-10-800-500-55-500
8-10-800-500-55-500
00-800-500-55-500
8-10-800-500-55-500
Russia
Kazakhstan
Uzbekistan
Kyrgyzstan
Tadjikistan
8-800-502-0000
Ukraine
810-800-500-55-500
00-800-500-55-500
8-800-77777
8000-7267
800-7267
1300 362 603
0800 SAMSUNG (0800 726 786)
400-810-5858, 010-6475 1880
Belarus
Moldova
Lithuania
Latvia
Estonia
Australia
New Zealand
China
3698-4698
Hong Kong
3030 8282, 1800 110011, 1800 3000 8282
0800-112-8888
0120-327-527
1800-88-9999
1-800-10-SAMSUNG (726-7864), 1-800-3-SAMSUNG (726-7864),
1-800-8-SAMSUNG (726-7864), 02-5805777
1800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
1800-29-3232, 02-689-3232
0800-329-999
1 800 588 889
444 77 11
0860-SAMSUNG (726-7864 )
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864), 8000-4726
India
Indonesia
Japan
Malaysia
Region
North America
Latin America
Europe
CIS
Asia Pacific
Philippines
Singapore
Thailand
Taiwan
Vietnam
Turkey
South Africa
U.A.E
Middle East &
Africa